[opensuse-translation-commit] r90543 - trunk/yast/zh_CN/po

Author: marguerite Date: 2014-10-30 11:00:27 +0100 (Thu, 30 Oct 2014) New Revision: 90543 Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/audit-laf.zh_CN.po trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/auth-client.zh_CN.po trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/auth-server.zh_CN.po trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/autoinst.zh_CN.po trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/bootloader.zh_CN.po trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/cluster.zh_CN.po trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/control.zh_CN.po trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/crowbar.zh_CN.po trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/drbd.zh_CN.po trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/geo-cluster.zh_CN.po trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/iscsi-lio-server.zh_CN.po trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/isns.zh_CN.po trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/mail.zh_CN.po trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/registration.zh_CN.po trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/storage.zh_CN.po Log: [cn]update all Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/audit-laf.zh_CN.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/audit-laf.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 09:48:57 UTC (rev 90542) +++ trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/audit-laf.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 10:00:27 UTC (rev 90543) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 16:20+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-07-05 15:44+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 17:32+0800\n" "Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <marguerite@opensuse.org>\n" "Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_CN\n" @@ -518,18 +518,26 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:54 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Auditd Log File Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file <i>/var/log/audit/audit.log</i> (default).\n" -"Events may come from the <i>apparmor</i> kernel module, from applications which use <i>libaudit</i> (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file watches).</p>" +"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is " +"responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file <i>" +"/var/log/audit/audit.log</i> (default).\n" +"Events may come from the <i>apparmor</i> kernel module, from applications " +"which use <i>libaudit</i> (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file " +"watches).</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Auditd 日志文件配置</big></b><br>\n" -"审计守护精灵是 LInux 审计系统的组件，该系统负责写入所有相关的审计事件到日志文件 <i>/var/log/audit/audit.log</i> (默认)。\n" -"事件可能来自 <i>apparmor</i> 内核模块、使用 <i>libaudit</i> 的应用程序 (例如 PAM) 或者由规则触发的事件 (例如文件监视)。</p>" +"审计守护精灵是 LInux 审计系统的组件，该系统负责写入所有相关的审计事件到日志文件 <i>/var/log/audit/audit.log</i> " +"(默认)。\n" +"事件可能来自 <i>apparmor</i> 内核模块、使用 <i>libaudit</i> 的应用程序 (例如 PAM) 或者由规则触发的事件 " +"(例如文件监视)。</p>" #. logfile_settings dialog help 2/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:60 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Rules for auditctl</b> dialog offers more information about rules and the possibility to add rules.\n" -"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the manual page ('man auditd.conf').</p>" +"<p>The <b>Rules for auditctl</b> dialog offers more information about rules " +"and the possibility to add rules.\n" +"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the " +"manual page ('man auditd.conf').</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>auditctl 规则</b> 对话框提供了关于规则和添加规则的可能性的更多信息。\n" "关于日志文件设置的详细信息可以从 'man auditd.conf' 帮助手册页面获取。</p>" @@ -544,8 +552,10 @@ #. logfile_settings dialog help 4/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:68 msgid "" -"<p><b>Format</b>: set <i>RAW</i> to log all data (store in a format exactly as the kernel\n" -"sends it) or <i>NOLOG</i> to discard all audit information instead of writing it on disk (does not affect\n" +"<p><b>Format</b>: set <i>RAW</i> to log all data (store in a format exactly " +"as the kernel\n" +"sends it) or <i>NOLOG</i> to discard all audit information instead of writing " +"it on disk (does not affect\n" "data sent to the dispatcher).</p> " msgstr "" "<p><b>格式</b>：设置 <i>原始</i> 将记录所有数据 (用与内核发送的格式相同的格式来存储) 或者\n" @@ -554,9 +564,12 @@ #. logfile_settings dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:74 msgid "" -"<p><b>Flush</b>: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to <i>INCREMENTAL</i> the\n" -"<b>Frequency</b> parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an explicit flush to disk.\n" -"<i>NONE</i> means: no special effort is made to flush data, <i>DATA</i>: keep data portion synced,\n" +"<p><b>Flush</b>: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to <i>" +"INCREMENTAL</i> the\n" +"<b>Frequency</b> parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an " +"explicit flush to disk.\n" +"<i>NONE</i> means: no special effort is made to flush data, <i>DATA</i>: keep " +"data portion synced,\n" "<i>SYNC</i>: keep data and meta-data fully synced.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>刷新</b>：描述了如何把数据写到磁盘。如果设置为 <i>增量</i>，<b>频率</b> 参数将定义\n" @@ -566,16 +579,20 @@ #. logfile_settings dialog help 6/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:81 msgid "" -"<p>Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take when this\n" +"<p>Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take " +"when this\n" "value is reached via <b>Size and Action</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "<p>通过 <b>大小和操作</b> 配置最大日志文件大小 (以 MB 计) 和当此大小达到时的操作。</p>\n" #. logfile_settings dialog help 7/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:85 msgid "" -"<p>If the action is set to <i>ROTATE</i> the <b>Number of Log Files</b> specifies the number\n" -"of files to keep. Set to <i>SYSLOG</i>, the audit daemon will write a warning\n" -"to /var/log/messages. With <i>SUSPEND</i> the daemon stops writing records to\n" +"<p>If the action is set to <i>ROTATE</i> the <b>Number of Log Files</b> " +"specifies the number\n" +"of files to keep. Set to <i>SYSLOG</i>, the audit daemon will write a " +"warning\n" +"to /var/log/messages. With <i>SUSPEND</i> the daemon stops writing records " +"to\n" "disk. <i>IGNORE</i> means do nothing, <i>KEEP_LOGS</i> is similar\n" "to ROTATE, but log files are not overwritten.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -587,10 +604,13 @@ #. logfile_settings dialog help 8/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:93 msgid "" -"<p><b>Computer Name Format</b> describes how to write the computer name to the\n" +"<p><b>Computer Name Format</b> describes how to write the computer name to " +"the\n" "log file. If <i>USER</i> is set, the <b>User Defined Name</b> is\n" -"used. <i>NONE</i> means no computer name is inserted. <i>HOSTNAME</i> uses the\n" -"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. <i>FQD</i> uses the fully qualified\n" +"used. <i>NONE</i> means no computer name is inserted. <i>HOSTNAME</i> uses " +"the\n" +"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. <i>FQD</i> uses the fully " +"qualified\n" "domain name.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>计算机名称格式</b>描述了如何将计算机名写入到日志文件。\n" @@ -601,7 +621,8 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:101 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Auditd Dispatcher Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the manual page\n" +"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the " +"manual page\n" "('man auditd.conf').</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Auditd 调度程序配置</big></b><br>\n" @@ -610,16 +631,20 @@ #. dispatcher dialog help 2/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:107 msgid "" -"<p><b>Dispatcher</b>: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon and\n" +"<p><b>Dispatcher</b>: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon " +"and\n" "gets all audit events on stdin.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>调度程序</b>：调度程序由审计守护精灵启动并从系统输入获得全部审计事件。</p>" #. dispatcher dialog help 3/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:111 msgid "" -"<p><b>Communication</b>: Controls the communication between the daemon and the dispatcher\n" -"program. A <i>lossy</i> communication means that events going to the dispatcher are discarded\n" -"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose <i>lossless</i> if you want a blocking/lossless\n" +"<p><b>Communication</b>: Controls the communication between the daemon and " +"the dispatcher\n" +"program. A <i>lossy</i> communication means that events going to the " +"dispatcher are discarded\n" +"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose <i>lossless</i> if you want a " +"blocking/lossless\n" "communication.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>通信</b>：控制守护精灵和调度程序之间的通信。\n" @@ -630,7 +655,8 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "<p>The dispatcher 'audispd' is an audit event multiplexor.\n" -"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man audispd.conf').</p>" +"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man " +"audispd.conf').</p>" msgstr "" "<p>调度程序 'audispd' 是一个审计事件多路复用器。\n" "详细信息请参考 'man audispd' 和 'man audispd.conf' 帮助手册页面。</p>" @@ -656,15 +682,18 @@ #. disk space dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:132 msgid "" -"<p><b>Space Left</b> (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform an <b>Action</b> because\n" +"<p><b>Space Left</b> (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform an " +"<b>Action</b> because\n" "the system is starting to run low on space.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>磁盘剩余</b> (以 MB 计) 当系统空间过低时通知审计守护精灵执行 <b>操作</b>。</p>" #. disk space dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:136 msgid "" -"<p>The value for <b>Admin Space Left</b> should be lower than above. The system <b>is running\n" -"low</b> on disk space if the value is reached and the specified <b>Action</b> will be performed.</p>" +"<p>The value for <b>Admin Space Left</b> should be lower than above. The " +"system <b>is running\n" +"low</b> on disk space if the value is reached and the specified <b>Action</b> " +"will be performed.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>管理空间剩余</b>的值应该低于上面的。如果达到该值，则系统磁盘 <b>将满</b>，\n" "指定 <b>操作</b> 会被执行。</p>" @@ -688,8 +717,10 @@ #. disk space dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:150 msgid "" -"<p>You can also specify a <b>Disk Full Action</b> (disk has become full already) and\n" -"a <b>Disk Error Action</b> (performed whenever an error is detected while writing to disk).\n" +"<p>You can also specify a <b>Disk Full Action</b> (disk has become full " +"already) and\n" +"a <b>Disk Error Action</b> (performed whenever an error is detected while " +"writing to disk).\n" "Available actions are the same as above (except for <i>EMAIL</i>).</p>" msgstr "" "<p>您也可以指定一个 <b>磁盘已满操作</b> (磁盘已经写满) 和一个 <b>磁盘错误操作</b> (当写入磁盘出错时执行)。\n" @@ -699,7 +730,8 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:156 msgid "" "<p><b>Note:</b> All scripts specified for <i>EXEC</i> must be owned\n" -"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be entered.</p>\n" +"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be " +"entered.</p>\n" msgstr "<p><b>注意：</b>所有 <i>执行</i> 代码必须由 'root' 拥有，有 '0750' 文件选项，和完整路径名。</p>\n" #. rules dialog help 1/6 @@ -716,20 +748,26 @@ #. rules dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:167 -msgid "<p><b>Note:</b><br>Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next reboot.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Note:</b><br>Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next " +"reboot.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>注意：</b><br>锁定规则意味着它们在下次重启前不能修改。</p>" #. rules dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:171 msgid "" "<p>Enabling auditing without additional rules will cause the\n" -" applications which use <i>libaudit</i>, e.g. PAM to log to /var/log/audit/audit.log (default).</p> " -msgstr "<p>不带附加规则启用审计会造成使用 <i>libaudit</i> 的应用程序，例如 PAM，记录日志到 /var/log/audit/audit.log (默认)。</p>" +" applications which use <i>libaudit</i>, e.g. PAM to log to " +"/var/log/audit/audit.log (default).</p> " +msgstr "" +"<p>不带附加规则启用审计会造成使用 <i>libaudit</i> 的应用程序，例如 PAM，记录日志到 " +"/var/log/audit/audit.log (默认)。</p>" #. rules dialog help 4/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:175 msgid "" -"<p>You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for advanced users.<br>\n" +"<p>You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for " +"advanced users.<br>\n" "For more information about all options, see 'man auditctl'.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>您也可以手动编辑规则，只推荐高级用户这么做。<br>\n" @@ -737,8 +775,13 @@ #. rules dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:179 -msgid "<p><b>Check Syntax</b> sends the rules via <i>auditctl</i> to the audit subsystem and checks the syntax.<br><b>Restore</b> restores the settings from /etc/audit/audit.rules.</p>\n" -msgstr "<p><b>检查语法</b> 通过 <i>auditctl</i> 发送规则给审计子系统并检查语法。<br><b>恢复</b>从 /etc/audit/audit.rules 恢复设置。</p>\n" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Check Syntax</b> sends the rules via <i>auditctl</i> to the audit " +"subsystem and checks the syntax.<br><b>Restore</b> restores the settings from " +"/etc/audit/audit.rules.</p>\n" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>检查语法</b> 通过 <i>auditctl</i> 发送规则给审计子系统并检查语法。<br><b>恢复</b>从 " +"/etc/audit/audit.rules 恢复设置。</p>\n" #. rules dialog help 6/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:183 @@ -779,7 +822,9 @@ #. skip it during initial and second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:318 -msgid "<p>To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package <b>%1</b> must be installed.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package <b>%1</b> " +"must be installed.</p>" msgstr "<p>要继续配置 Linux 审计，必须安装 <b>%1</b> 软件包。</p>" #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:321 @@ -855,12 +900,13 @@ #. question shown in a popup about start of audit daemon #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:463 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Do you want to start it and enable start at boot\n" msgid "" "Do you want to start it and enable start at boot\n" "or only start the daemon for now?" -msgstr "您想要启动它并启用其引导时启动吗\n" +msgstr "" +"您想要启动它并启用开机自启动吗？\n" +"还是仅启动该守护进程？" #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:466 msgid "The daemon 'auditd' doesn't run.\n" @@ -868,7 +914,6 @@ #. message about loaded kernel module #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:470 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "" #| " The 'apparmor' kernel module is loaded.\n" #| "The kernel uses a running audit daemon to log audit\n" @@ -880,9 +925,8 @@ "events to /var/log/audit/audit.log (default).\n" msgstr "" " ‘apparmor’ 内核模块已加载。\n" -"内核使用一个运行中的审计守护精灵来记录审计事件到\n" +"内核使用一个运行中的审计守护进程来记录审计事件到\n" "/var/log/audit/audit.log (默认)。\n" -"您想要立即启动守护精灵吗？" #. Headline of a popup #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:477 Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/auth-client.zh_CN.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/auth-client.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 09:48:57 UTC (rev 90542) +++ trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/auth-client.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 10:00:27 UTC (rev 90543) @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 16:20+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-06-25 23:10+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 17:52+0800\n" "Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <marguerite@opensuse.org>\n" "Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_CN\n" @@ -180,10 +180,9 @@ #. Main dialog contents #: src/include/dialogs.rb:512 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Authentication Key" msgid "Authentication Client" -msgstr "身份验证密钥" +msgstr "认证客户端" #: src/include/dialogs.rb:526 src/include/dialogs.rb:599 #: src/include/dialogs.rb:605 @@ -209,8 +208,42 @@ #. initialize GUI #: src/include/dialogs.rb:553 -msgid "SSSD provides a set of daemons to manage access to remote directories and authentication mechanisms.<br>You have to confiugre at least one authentication domain.<br>The first you have to set for a authentication domain is the identification and auth provider used for the domain.<br>In the next step you have to set some mandatory parameter for the selected providers.You can select later all parameters available for the selected identification and auth provider.SSSD provides following id_provider:<br><b>proxy</b>: Support a legacy NSS provider.<br><b>local</b>: SSSD internal provider for local users.<br><b>ldap</b>: LDAP provider. See sssd-ldap(5) for more information on configuring LDAP.<br><b>ipa</b>: FreeIPA and Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management provider.<br><b>ad</b>: Active Directory provider.<br>Supported auth providers are:<br><b>ldap</b> for native LDAP authentication.<br><b>krb5</b> for Kerberos authentication.<br><b>ipa</b> FreeIPA and Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management provider.<br><b>ad</b> Active Directory provider.<br><b>proxy</b> for relaying authentication to some other PAM target.<br><b>none</b> disables authentication explicitly.<br>The default auth provider is the id_provider.<br>" +msgid "" +"SSSD provides a set of daemons to manage access to remote directories and " +"authentication mechanisms.<br>You have to confiugre at least one " +"authentication domain.<br>The first you have to set for a authentication " +"domain is the identification and auth provider used for the domain.<br>In the " +"next step you have to set some mandatory parameter for the selected " +"providers.You can select later all parameters available for the selected " +"identification and auth provider.SSSD provides following id_provider:<br><b>" +"proxy</b>: Support a legacy NSS provider.<br><b>local</b>: SSSD internal " +"provider for local users.<br><b>ldap</b>: LDAP provider. See sssd-ldap(5) for " +"more information on configuring LDAP.<br><b>ipa</b>: FreeIPA and Red Hat " +"Enterprise Identity Management provider.<br><b>ad</b>: Active Directory " +"provider.<br>Supported auth providers are:<br><b>ldap</b> for native LDAP " +"authentication.<br><b>krb5</b> for Kerberos authentication.<br><b>ipa</b> " +"FreeIPA and Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management provider.<br><b>ad</b> " +"Active Directory provider.<br><b>proxy</b> for relaying authentication to " +"some other PAM target.<br><b>none</b> disables authentication explicitly.<br>" +"The default auth provider is the id_provider.<br>" msgstr "" +"SSSD 提供了一系列守护进程来管理对远程文件夹的访问权和认证机制。 <br>" +"您必须配置至少一个认证域。<br>" +"您必须为认证域设置的首先是该域所用的身份和认证提供方。<br>" +"下一步您必须为所选提供方设置一些必需参数。稍后您可以选择全部可用于所选身份和认证提供方的参数。SSSD 提供了以下 id_provider：<br>" +"<b>proxy</b>: 支持传统的 NSS 提供方。<br>" +"<b>local</b>: 用于本地用户的 SSSD 内部提供方。<br>" +"<b>ldap</b>: LDAP 提供方。可参考 sssd-ldap(5) 获取更多信息配置 LDAP。<br>" +"<b>ipa</b>: FreeIPA 和 Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management 提供方。<br>" +"<b>ad</b>: 活动目录提供方。<br>" +"支持的认证提供方有：<br>" +"<b>ldap</b> 用于原生 LDAP 认证。<br>" +"<b>krb5</b> 用于 Kerberos 认证。<br>" +"<b>ipa</b> FreeIPA 和 Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management 提供方。<br>" +"<b>ad</b> 活动目录提供方。<br>" +"<b>proxy</b> 用于对某些其它 PAM 对象的延迟认证。<br>" +"<b>none</b> 显式禁用认证。<br>" +"默认认证提供方与 id_provider 相同。<br>" #. Define Global Parameters #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:17 @@ -218,48 +251,70 @@ msgstr "揭示了配置文件的语法。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:21 -msgid "Comma separated list of services that are started when sssd itself starts." +msgid "" +"Comma separated list of services that are started when sssd itself starts." msgstr "以逗号分隔的当 sssd 自身启动时也将启动的服务列表。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:26 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:79 -msgid "Number of times services should attempt to reconnect in the event of a Data Provider crash or restart before they give up" +msgid "" +"Number of times services should attempt to reconnect in the event of a Data " +"Provider crash or restart before they give up" msgstr "当数据提供者崩溃或重启时在放弃前服务应尝试重连的次数" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:30 -msgid "SSSD can use more domains at the same time, but at least one must be configured or SSSD won't start." +msgid "" +"SSSD can use more domains at the same time, but at least one must be " +"configured or SSSD won't start." msgstr "SSSD 可同时使用更多域，但必须配置至少一个否则 SSSD 不会启动。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:31 -msgid "This parameter contains the list of domains in the order these will be queried." +msgid "" +"This parameter contains the list of domains in the order these will be " +"queried." msgstr "此参数包含了以查询顺序排列的域列表。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:35 -msgid "Default regular expression that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components" +msgid "" +"Default regular expression that describes how to parse the string containing " +"user name and domain into these components" msgstr "默认正则表达式描述了如何解析包含用户名和域的字符串到这些组件中" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:39 -msgid "The default printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple into a fully qualified name." +msgid "" +"The default printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a " +"(name, domain) tuple into a fully qualified name." msgstr "默认的 printf(3) 兼容格式，描述了如何转义 (name, domain) 元组为完全限定名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:43 -msgid "SSSD monitors the state of resolv.conf to identify when it needs to update its internal DNS resolver." +msgid "" +"SSSD monitors the state of resolv.conf to identify when it needs to update " +"its internal DNS resolver." msgstr "SSSD 监控着 resolv.conf 的状态来识别它是否需要更新其内部 DNS 解析器。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:44 -msgid "By default, we will attempt to use inotify for this, and will fall back to polling resolv.conf every five seconds if inotify cannot be used." +msgid "" +"By default, we will attempt to use inotify for this, and will fall back to " +"polling resolv.conf every five seconds if inotify cannot be used." msgstr "默认我们将尝试使用 inotify，若 inotify 不可用则回退为每五秒轮询 resolv.conf 一次。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:48 -msgid "Directory on the filesystem where SSSD should store Kerberos replay cache files." +msgid "" +"Directory on the filesystem where SSSD should store Kerberos replay cache " +"files." msgstr "SSSD 应在文件系统上存放 Kerberos 回放缓存文件的文件夹。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:52 -msgid "This string will be used as a default domain name for all names without a domain name component." +msgid "" +"This string will be used as a default domain name for all names without a " +"domain name component." msgstr "此字符串将用作全部没有域名组件的名称的默认域名。" #. Define Global Services Parameters #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:59 -msgid "Bit mask that indicates which debug levels will be visible. 0x0010 is the default value as well as the lowest allowed value, 0xFFF0 is the most verbose mode." +msgid "" +"Bit mask that indicates which debug levels will be visible. 0x0010 is the " +"default value as well as the lowest allowed value, 0xFFF0 is the most verbose " +"mode." msgstr "表示可见调试级别的位掩码。0x0010 是默认值也是允许的最小值，0xFFF0是最详尽模式。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:64 @@ -275,28 +330,42 @@ msgstr "此服务心跳间超时秒数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:84 -msgid "This option specifies the maximum number of file descriptors that may be opened at one time by this SSSD process." +msgid "" +"This option specifies the maximum number of file descriptors that may be " +"opened at one time by this SSSD process." msgstr "此选项指定了此 SSSD 进程同一时间可打开的最大文件描述符数目。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:89 -msgid "This option specifies the number of seconds that a client of an SSSD process can hold onto a file descriptor without communicating on it." +msgid "" +"This option specifies the number of seconds that a client of an SSSD process " +"can hold onto a file descriptor without communicating on it." msgstr "此选项指定了 SSSD 进程客户端可持有文件描述符而不与之通信的秒数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:94 -msgid "If a service is not responding to ping checks (see the “timeout” option), it is first sent the SIGTERM signal that instructs it to quit gracefully." +msgid "" +"If a service is not responding to ping checks (see the “timeout” option), it " +"is first sent the SIGTERM signal that instructs it to quit gracefully." msgstr "若服务不响应 ping 检查 (参考「超时」选项) ，它将会先发送 SIGTERM 信号引导服务优雅地退出。" #. NSS configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:102 -msgid "How many seconds should cache nss_sss enumerations (requests for info about all users)?" +msgid "" +"How many seconds should cache nss_sss enumerations (requests for info about " +"all users)?" msgstr "缓存 nss_css 枚举 (对全部用户信息的请求) 的秒数" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:107 -msgid "The entry cache can be set to automatically update entries in the background if they are requested beyond a percentage of the entry_cache_timeout value for the domain." +msgid "" +"The entry cache can be set to automatically update entries in the background " +"if they are requested beyond a percentage of the entry_cache_timeout value " +"for the domain." msgstr "若请求条目时间超出了该域 entry_cache_timeout 值的某个百分比，则可将条目缓存设为在后台自动更新条目。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:112 -msgid "Specifies for how many seconds nss_sss should cache negative cache hits (that is, queries for invalid database entries, like nonexistent ones) before asking the back end again." +msgid "" +"Specifies for how many seconds nss_sss should cache negative cache hits (that " +"is, queries for invalid database entries, like nonexistent ones) before " +"asking the back end again." msgstr "指定了再次询问后端前 nss_sss 应缓存否定缓存次数 (即，针对无效数据库条目如不存在条目的查询) 的秒数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:117 @@ -308,15 +377,20 @@ msgstr "从 sss NSS 数据库撷取组时排除特定组。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:127 -msgid "If you want filtered user to still be group members set this option to false." +msgid "" +"If you want filtered user to still be group members set this option to false." msgstr "若您想使被过滤的用户仍留作组成员则请设置此选项为假。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:131 -msgid "Override the user's home directory. You can either provide an absolute value or a template." +msgid "" +"Override the user's home directory. You can either provide an absolute value " +"or a template." msgstr "覆盖用户主文件夹。您可以提供一个绝对值或一个模板。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:135 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1101 -msgid "Set a default template for a user's home directory if one is not specified explicitly by the domain's data provider." +msgid "" +"Set a default template for a user's home directory if one is not specified " +"explicitly by the domain's data provider." msgstr "设置当某域的数据提供者未显式指定用户主文件夹时所用的默认模板。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:139 @@ -332,36 +406,50 @@ msgstr "使用 shell_fallback 替换这些壳层中的任何一种" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:152 -msgid "The default shell to use if an allowed shell is not installed on the machine." +msgid "" +"The default shell to use if an allowed shell is not installed on the machine." msgstr "机器上未安装获准使用的壳层时所使用的默认壳层。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:156 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1105 -msgid "The default shell to use if the provider does not return one during lookup." +msgid "" +"The default shell to use if the provider does not return one during lookup." msgstr "查询时提供者未返回值时所使用的默认壳层。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:161 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:204 -msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which the list of subdomains will be considered valid." +msgid "" +"Specifies time in seconds for which the list of subdomains will be considered " +"valid." msgstr "指定了子域列表被认定有效的秒数 。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:166 -msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which records in the in-memory cache will be valid." +msgid "" +"Specifies time in seconds for which records in the in-memory cache will be " +"valid." msgstr "指定了内存缓存中记录的有效秒数。" #. PAM configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:174 -msgid "If the authentication provider is offline, how long we should allow cached logins (in days since the last successful online login)." +msgid "" +"If the authentication provider is offline, how long we should allow cached " +"logins (in days since the last successful online login)." msgstr "认证提供者离线时应允许缓存登入的天数 (自上次成功在线登入起的天数)" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:179 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:184 -msgid "The time in minutes which has to pass after offline_failed_login_attempts has been reached before a new login attempt is possible." +msgid "" +"The time in minutes which has to pass after offline_failed_login_attempts has " +"been reached before a new login attempt is possible." msgstr "触及 offline_failed_login_attempts 后可进行新登录尝试前必须等待的以分钟计的时间。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:189 -msgid "Controls what kind of messages are shown to the user during authentication." +msgid "" +"Controls what kind of messages are shown to the user during authentication." msgstr "控制在认证期间展示给用户的消息类型。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:194 -msgid "For any PAM request while SSSD is online, the SSSD will attempt to immediately update the cached identity information for the user in order to ensure that authentication takes place with the latest information." +msgid "" +"For any PAM request while SSSD is online, the SSSD will attempt to " +"immediately update the cached identity information for the user in order to " +"ensure that authentication takes place with the latest information." msgstr "SSSD 在线时对于任何 PAM 请求，SSSD 均会尝试立即更新缓存的该用户身份信息以确保认证使用了最新信息。" #. The kerberos domain section @@ -372,27 +460,37 @@ #. SUDO configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:212 -msgid "Whether or not to evaluate the sudoNotBefore and sudoNotAfter attributes that implement time-dependent sudoers entries." +msgid "" +"Whether or not to evaluate the sudoNotBefore and sudoNotAfter attributes that " +"implement time-dependent sudoers entries." msgstr "是否评骘实现了随时间变化的 sudoer 项的 sudoNotBefore 和 sudoNotAfter 属性。" #. AUTOFS configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:220 -msgid "Specifies for how many seconds the autofs responder should cache negative hits before asking the back end again." +msgid "" +"Specifies for how many seconds the autofs responder should cache negative " +"hits before asking the back end again." msgstr "指定了再次询问后端前 autofs 回应者应缓存否定次数的秒数。" #. SSH configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:228 -msgid "Whether or not to hash host names and addresses in the managed known_hosts file." +msgid "" +"Whether or not to hash host names and addresses in the managed known_hosts " +"file." msgstr "是否在受管 known_hosts 文件中哈希化主机名和地址。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:233 -msgid "How many seconds to keep a host in the managed known_hosts file after its host keys were requested." +msgid "" +"How many seconds to keep a host in the managed known_hosts file after its " +"host keys were requested." msgstr "已请求主机密钥后在受管 known_hosts 文件中保存主机的秒数。" #. DOMAIN SECTIONS #. These configuration options can be present in a domain configuration section, that is, in a section called “[domain/NAME]” #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:242 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:247 -msgid "UID and GID limits for the domain. If a domain contains an entry that is outside these limits, it is ignored." +msgid "" +"UID and GID limits for the domain. If a domain contains an entry that is " +"outside these limits, it is ignored." msgstr "该域的 UID 和 GID 限制。若某域含有一个超出这些限制的项，则忽略该项。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:252 @@ -400,35 +498,51 @@ msgstr "确定某域是否可枚举。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:257 -msgid "If the service does not terminate after “force_timeout” seconds, the monitor will forcibly shut it down by sending a SIGKILL signal." +msgid "" +"If the service does not terminate after “force_timeout” seconds, the monitor " +"will forcibly shut it down by sending a SIGKILL signal." msgstr "若服务在 \"force_timeout\" 秒后未终止，监控器将发送一个 SIGKILL 信号强制关闭它。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:262 -msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgid "" +"How many seconds nss_sss should consider entries valid before asking the " +"backend again." msgstr "再次询问后端前 nss_sss 应认定条目有效的秒数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:267 -msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider user entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgid "" +"How many seconds nss_sss should consider user entries valid before asking the " +"backend again." msgstr "再次询问后端前 nss_sss 应认定用户项有效的秒数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:272 -msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider group entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgid "" +"How many seconds nss_sss should consider group entries valid before asking " +"the backend again." msgstr "再次询问后端前 nss_sss 应认定组项有效的秒数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:277 -msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider netgroup entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgid "" +"How many seconds nss_sss should consider netgroup entries valid before asking " +"the backend again." msgstr "再次询问后端前 nss_sss 应认定网络组项有效的秒数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:282 -msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider service entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgid "" +"How many seconds nss_sss should consider service entries valid before asking " +"the backend again." msgstr "再次询问后端前 nss_sss 应认定服务项有效的秒数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:287 -msgid "How many seconds sudo should consider rules valid before asking the backend again." +msgid "" +"How many seconds sudo should consider rules valid before asking the backend " +"again." msgstr "再次询问后端前 sudo 应认定规则有效的秒数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:292 -msgid "How many seconds the autofs service should consider automounter maps valid before asking the backend again." +msgid "" +"How many seconds the autofs service should consider automounter maps valid " +"before asking the backend again." msgstr "再次询问后端前 autofs 服务应认定自动挂载器映射有效的秒数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:297 @@ -436,7 +550,9 @@ msgstr "确定是否也在本地 LDB 缓存中缓存用户机要。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:302 -msgid "Number of days entries are left in cache after last successful login before being removed during a cleanup of the cache." +msgid "" +"Number of days entries are left in cache after last successful login before " +"being removed during a cleanup of the cache." msgstr "在自缓存清理期间移除前应在缓存中保留条目的从最后成功登入日起计的天数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:307 @@ -444,7 +560,9 @@ msgstr "该域所用的标识提供者。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:312 -msgid "Use the full name and domain (as formatted by the domain's full_name_format) as the user's login name reported to NSS." +msgid "" +"Use the full name and domain (as formatted by the domain's full_name_format) " +"as the user's login name reported to NSS." msgstr "使用完整名称和域 (格式化成该域的完整名称格式) 作为汇报给 NSS 的该用户的登录名。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:318 @@ -456,7 +574,8 @@ msgstr "该域所用的访问控制提供者。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:330 -msgid "The provider which should handle change password operations for the domain." +msgid "" +"The provider which should handle change password operations for the domain." msgstr "应受理该域的密码变更操作的提供者。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:336 @@ -480,19 +599,27 @@ msgstr "用于撷取主机身份信息的提供者。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:365 -msgid "Regular expression for this domain that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components." +msgid "" +"Regular expression for this domain that describes how to parse the string " +"containing user name and domain into these components." msgstr "用于此域的正则表达式，描述了如何解析包含用户名和域的字符串到这些组件中。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:370 -msgid "A printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple for this domain into a fully qualified name." +msgid "" +"A printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, " +"domain) tuple for this domain into a fully qualified name." msgstr "一种 printf(3) 兼容格式，描述了如何转义此域的 (name, domain) 元组为完全限定名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:376 -msgid "Provides the ability to select preferred address family to use when performing DNS lookups." +msgid "" +"Provides the ability to select preferred address family to use when " +"performing DNS lookups." msgstr "提供了执行 DNS 查询时选择偏好的地址族的能力。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:381 -msgid "Defines the amount of time (in seconds) to wait for a reply from the DNS resolver before assuming that it is unreachable." +msgid "" +"Defines the amount of time (in seconds) to wait for a reply from the DNS " +"resolver before assuming that it is unreachable." msgstr "定义了假设其不可达前等待 DNS 解析者回复的以秒计的时间。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:385 @@ -500,7 +627,9 @@ msgstr "使用机器主机名的域部分。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:386 -msgid "If service discovery is used in the back end, specifies the domain part of the service discovery DNS query." +msgid "" +"If service discovery is used in the back end, specifies the domain part of " +"the service discovery DNS query." msgstr "若后端使用了服务发现，则指定了服务发现 DNS 查询的域部分。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:390 @@ -512,11 +641,15 @@ msgstr "视用户和组名称为大小写敏感的。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:400 -msgid "When a user or group is looked up by name in the proxy provider, a second lookup by ID is performed to 'canonicalize' the name in case the requested name was an alias." +msgid "" +"When a user or group is looked up by name in the proxy provider, a second " +"lookup by ID is performed to 'canonicalize' the name in case the requested " +"name was an alias." msgstr "当在代理提供者上按名称查询某个用户或组时，也执行按 ID 的二次查询以 '规范化' 该名称以防止所请求的名称是一个别名。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:405 -msgid "Use this homedir as default value for all subdomains within this domain." +msgid "" +"Use this homedir as default value for all subdomains within this domain." msgstr "使用此主文件夹作为此域中全部子域的默认值。" #. Following options will be provided by SSSD's 'simple' access-control provider @@ -525,7 +658,9 @@ msgstr "逗号分隔的允许登入用户列表。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:416 -msgid "Comma separated list of groups who are allowed to log in. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgid "" +"Comma separated list of groups who are allowed to log in. This applies only " +"to groups within this SSSD domain." msgstr "逗号分隔的允许登入组列表。这仅应用于此 SSSD 域中的组。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:421 @@ -533,7 +668,9 @@ msgstr "逗号分隔的显式拒绝访问用户列表。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:426 -msgid "Comma separated list of groups that are explicitly denied access. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgid "" +"Comma separated list of groups that are explicitly denied access. This " +"applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." msgstr "逗号分隔的显式拒绝访问组列表。这仅应用于此 SSSD 域中的组。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:432 @@ -543,23 +680,32 @@ #. The local domain section #. This section contains settings for domain that stores users and groups in SSSD native database, that is, a domain that uses id_provider=local. #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:441 -msgid "The tools append the login name to base_directory and use that as the home directory." +msgid "" +"The tools append the login name to base_directory and use that as the home " +"directory." msgstr "此工具会追加登入名到 base_directory 并用其作为主文件夹。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:446 -msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be created by default for new users." +msgid "" +"Indicate if a home directory should be created by default for new users." msgstr "指出是否应为新用户默认创建主文件夹。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:451 -msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be removed by default for deleted users." +msgid "" +"Indicate if a home directory should be removed by default for deleted users." msgstr "指出是否应默认移除已删除用户的主文件夹。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:456 -msgid "Used by sss_useradd(8) to specify the default permissions on a newly created home directory." +msgid "" +"Used by sss_useradd(8) to specify the default permissions on a newly created " +"home directory." msgstr "被 sss_useradd(8) 用来指定新创建的主文件夹的默认权限。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:461 -msgid "The skeleton directory, which contains files and directories to be copied in the user's home directory, when the home directory is created by sss_useradd(8)" +msgid "" +"The skeleton directory, which contains files and directories to be copied in " +"the user's home directory, when the home directory is created by " +"sss_useradd(8)" msgstr "骨架文件夹，其收纳了当 sss_useradd(8) 创建主文件夹时复制至用户主文件夹的文件和文件夹。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:466 @@ -572,11 +718,15 @@ #. The ldap domain section #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:479 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:484 -msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." +msgid "" +"Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD " +"should connect in the order of preference." msgstr "指定了逗号分隔的 SSSD 应以优先级顺序连接的 LDAP 服务器 URI 列表。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:490 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:496 -msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference to change the password of a user." +msgid "" +"Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD " +"should connect in the order of preference to change the password of a user." msgstr "指定了逗号分隔的 LDAP 服务器 URI 列表，SSSD 应以优先级顺序连接以修改用户密码。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:501 @@ -620,7 +770,8 @@ msgstr "对应着用户 gecos 字段的 LDAP 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:551 -msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains the name of the user's home directory." +msgid "" +" The LDAP attribute that contains the name of the user's home directory." msgstr "存放用户主文件夹名称的 LDAP 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:556 @@ -636,67 +787,114 @@ msgstr "存放 LDAP 用户对象的 objectSID 的 LDAP 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:571 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:776 -msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." +msgid "" +"The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the " +"parent object." msgstr "存放父对象最后修订时间戳记的 LDAP 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:576 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (date of the last password change)." -msgstr "当使用 ldap_pwd_policy=shadow 时，此参数存放了对应着其 shadow(5) 对手方(上次密码变更日期) 的 LDAP 属性名称。" +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " +"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (date of the last " +"password change)." +msgstr "" +"当使用 ldap_pwd_policy=shadow 时，此参数存放了对应着其 shadow(5) 对手方(上次密码变更日期) 的 LDAP 属性名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:581 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (minimum password age)." -msgstr "当使用 ldap_pwd_policy=shadow 时，此参数存放了对应着其 shadow(5) 对手方(最小密码有效期) 的 LDAP 属性名称。" +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " +"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (minimum password " +"age)." +msgstr "" +"当使用 ldap_pwd_policy=shadow 时，此参数存放了对应着其 shadow(5) 对手方(最小密码有效期) 的 LDAP 属性名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:586 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (maximum password age)." -msgstr "当使用 ldap_pwd_policy=shadow 时，此参数存放了对应着其 shadow(5) 对手方(最大密码有效期) 的 LDAP 属性名称。" +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " +"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (maximum password " +"age)." +msgstr "" +"当使用 ldap_pwd_policy=shadow 时，此参数存放了对应着其 shadow(5) 对手方(最大密码有效期) 的 LDAP 属性名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:591 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password warning period)." -msgstr "当使用 ldap_pwd_policy=shadow 时，此参数存放了对应着其 shadow(5) 对手方(密码告警时间) 的 LDAP 属性名称。" +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " +"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password warning " +"period)." +msgstr "" +"当使用 ldap_pwd_policy=shadow 时，此参数存放了对应着其 shadow(5) 对手方(密码告警时间) 的 LDAP 属性名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:596 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password inactivity period)." -msgstr "当使用 ldap_pwd_policy=shadow 时，此参数存放了对应着其 shadow(5) 对手方(密码无活动时间) 的 LDAP 属性名称。" +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " +"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password " +"inactivity period)." +msgstr "" +"当使用 ldap_pwd_policy=shadow 时，此参数存放了对应着其 shadow(5) 对手方(密码无活动时间) 的 LDAP 属性名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:601 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow or ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (account expiration date)." -msgstr "当使用 ldap_pwd_policy=shadow 或 ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow 时，此参数存放了对应着其 shadow(5) 对手方(账户过期日) 的 LDAP 属性名称。" +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow or ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, this " +"parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its " +"shadow(5) counterpart (account expiration date)." +msgstr "" +"当使用 ldap_pwd_policy=shadow 或 ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow 时，此参数存放了对应着其 " +"shadow(5) 对手方(账户过期日) 的 LDAP 属性名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:606 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time of last password change in kerberos." -msgstr "当使用 ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos 时，此参数存放了存储 kerberos 中上次密码变更日期和时间的 LDAP 属性的名称。" +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of " +"an LDAP attribute storing the date and time of last password change in " +"kerberos." +msgstr "" +"当使用 ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos 时，此参数存放了存储 kerberos 中上次密码变更日期和时间的 LDAP 属性的名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:611 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time when current password expires." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of " +"an LDAP attribute storing the date and time when current password expires." msgstr "当使用 ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos 时，此参数存放了存储当前密码过期日期和时间的 LDAP 属性的名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:616 -msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the expiration time of the account." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of " +"an LDAP attribute storing the expiration time of the account." msgstr "当使用 ldap_account_expire_policy=ad 时，此参数存放了存储账户过期时间的 LDAP 属性的名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:621 -msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the user account control bit field." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of " +"an LDAP attribute storing the user account control bit field." msgstr "当使用 ldap_account_expire_policy=ad 时，此参数存放了存储用户账户控制字节段的 LDAP 属性的名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:626 -msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds or equivalent, this parameter determines if access is allowed or not." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds or equivalent, this parameter " +"determines if access is allowed or not." msgstr "当使用 ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds 或等价物时，此参数确定了是否允许访问。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:631 -msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines if access is allowed or not." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines if " +"access is allowed or not." msgstr "当使用 ldap_account_expire_policy=nds 时，此属性确定了是否允许访问。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:636 -msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines until which date access is granted." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines until " +"which date access is granted." msgstr "当使用 ldap_account_expire_policy=nds 时，此属性确定了准予访问至的日期。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:641 -msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines the hours of a day in a week when access is granted." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines the " +"hours of a day in a week when access is granted." msgstr "当使用 ldap_account_expire_policy=nds 时，此属性确定了一周中每天准予访问的小时数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:646 -msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the user's Kerberos User Principal Name (UPN)." +msgid "" +"The LDAP attribute that contains the user's Kerberos User Principal Name " +"(UPN)." msgstr "存放用户的 Kerberos 用户实体名称 (UPN) 的 LDAP 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:650 @@ -704,7 +902,9 @@ msgstr "存放用户 SSH 公钥的 LDAP 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:655 -msgid "Some directory servers, for example Active Directory, might deliver the realm part of the UPN in lower case, which might cause the authentication to fail." +msgid "" +"Some directory servers, for example Active Directory, might deliver the realm " +"part of the UPN in lower case, which might cause the authentication to fail." msgstr "某些目录服务器，例如活动目录服务器，可能会以小写传递 UPN 的领域部分，这可能造成认证失败。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:656 @@ -712,11 +912,16 @@ msgstr "若您想要使用大写领域则请将此选项设为真。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:661 -msgid "Specifies how many seconds SSSD has to wait before refreshing its cache of enumerated records." +msgid "" +"Specifies how many seconds SSSD has to wait before refreshing its cache of " +"enumerated records." msgstr "指定了刷新其枚举记录缓存前 SSSD 必须等待的秒数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:666 -msgid "Determine how often to check the cache for inactive entries (such as groups with no members and users who have never logged in) and remove them to save space." +msgid "" +"Determine how often to check the cache for inactive entries (such as groups " +"with no members and users who have never logged in) and remove them to save " +"space." msgstr "确定了检查缓存中不活动项 (诸如没有成员的组和从未登入过的用户) 并移除它们节省空间的频率。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:671 @@ -728,12 +933,22 @@ msgstr "列出了用户的组成员资格的 LDAP 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:681 -msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSD will use the presence of the authorizedService attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." -msgstr "若 access_provider=ldap 且 ldap_access_order=authorized_service，SSSD 将依据 authorizedService 属性是否在该用户 LDAP 项中出现来确定访问权限。" +msgid "" +"If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSD will " +"use the presence of the authorizedService attribute in the user's LDAP entry " +"to determine access privilege." +msgstr "" +"若 access_provider=ldap 且 ldap_access_order=authorized_service，SSSD 将依据 " +"authorizedService 属性是否在该用户 LDAP 项中出现来确定访问权限。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:686 -msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=host, SSSD will use the presence of the host attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." -msgstr "若 access_provider=ldap 且 ldap_access_order=host，SSSD 将依据主机属性是否在该用户 LDAP 项中出现来确定访问权限。" +msgid "" +"If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=host, SSSD will use the " +"presence of the host attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access " +"privilege." +msgstr "" +"若 access_provider=ldap 且 ldap_access_order=host，SSSD 将依据主机属性是否在该用户 LDAP " +"项中出现来确定访问权限。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:696 msgid "The object class of a group entry in LDAP." @@ -760,19 +975,30 @@ msgstr "存放某 LDAP 组对象的 objectSID 的 LDAP 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:726 -msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." +msgid "" +" The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the " +"parent object." msgstr "存放父对象最后修订时间戳记的 LDAP 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:732 -msgid "If ldap_schema is set to a schema format that supports nested groups (e.g. RFC2307bis), then this option controls how many levels of nesting SSSD will follow." +msgid "" +"If ldap_schema is set to a schema format that supports nested groups (e.g. " +"RFC2307bis), then this option controls how many levels of nesting SSSD will " +"follow." msgstr "若 ldap_schema 设为支持嵌套组的方案格式 (例如 RFC2307bis)，则此选项控制了 SSSD 将跟随的嵌套级数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:738 -msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which may speed up group lookup operations on deployments with complex or deep nested groups." +msgid "" +"This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific " +"feature which may speed up group lookup operations on deployments with " +"complex or deep nested groups." msgstr "此选项告知 SSSD 利用一项活动目录独有特性，其可能加速在具有复杂或深度嵌套的组的部署上的组查询操作。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:744 -msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which might speed up initgroups operations (most notably when dealing with complex or deep nested groups)." +msgid "" +"This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific " +"feature which might speed up initgroups operations (most notably when dealing " +"with complex or deep nested groups)." msgstr "此选项告知 SSSD 利用一项活动目录独有特性，其可能加速 initgroups 操作 (当处理复杂或深度嵌套的组时最为显著)。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:750 @@ -788,11 +1014,13 @@ msgstr "存放网络组成员名称的 LDAP 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:766 -msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the (host, user, domain) netgroup triples." +msgid "" +"The LDAP attribute that contains the (host, user, domain) netgroup triples." msgstr "存放 (主机，用户，域) 网络组铁三角的 LDAP 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:771 -msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP netgroup object." +msgid "" +"The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP netgroup object." msgstr "存放某个 LDAP 网络组对象的 UUID/GUID 的 LDAP 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:781 @@ -800,7 +1028,9 @@ msgstr "LDAP 中服务项的对象类。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:786 -msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the name of service attributes and their aliases." +msgid "" +"The LDAP attribute that contains the name of service attributes and their " +"aliases." msgstr "存放服务属性名称和其别名的 LDAP 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:791 @@ -808,35 +1038,52 @@ msgstr "存放此服务管理的端口的 LDAP 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:796 -msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the protocols understood by this service." +msgid "" +"The LDAP attribute that contains the protocols understood by this service." msgstr "存放此服务可解析协议的 LDAP 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:802 -msgid "An optional base DN, search scope and LDAP filter to restrict LDAP searches for this attribute type." +msgid "" +"An optional base DN, search scope and LDAP filter to restrict LDAP searches " +"for this attribute type." msgstr "一个可选的基本判别名/搜索范围/LDAP 过滤器，可限制 LDAP 搜索只搜索此属性类型。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:807 -msgid " Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." +msgid "" +" Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches are allowed to run " +"before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode " +"is entered)." msgstr "指定了取消并返回缓存结果 (并进入离线模式) 前 LDAP 搜索允许运行的以秒计超时。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:812 -msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches for user and group enumerations are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." +msgid "" +"Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches for user and group " +"enumerations are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results " +"are returned (and offline mode is entered)." msgstr "指定了取消并返回缓存结果 (并进入离线模式) 前 LDAP 用户和组枚举搜索允许运行的以秒计超时。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:817 -msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) after which the poll(2)/select(2) following a connect(2) returns in case of no activity." +msgid "" +"Specifies the timeout (in seconds) after which the poll(2)/select(2) " +"following a connect(2) returns in case of no activity." msgstr "指定了无活动时 poll(2)/select(2) 跟随 connect(2) 返回的以秒计超时。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:822 -msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after which calls to synchronous LDAP APIs will abort if no response is received." +msgid "" +"Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after which calls to synchronous LDAP APIs " +"will abort if no response is received." msgstr "指定了无回应时同步 LDAP API 调用中止的以秒计超时。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:827 -msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) that a connection to an LDAP server will be maintained." +msgid "" +"Specifies a timeout (in seconds) that a connection to an LDAP server will be " +"maintained." msgstr "指定了维持到 LDAP 服务器连接的以秒计超时。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:832 -msgid "Specify the number of records to retrieve from LDAP in a single request. Some LDAP servers enforce a maximum limit per-request." +msgid "" +"Specify the number of records to retrieve from LDAP in a single request. Some " +"LDAP servers enforce a maximum limit per-request." msgstr "指定了单一请求从 LDAP 撷取的记录数。某些 LDAP 服务器强制单一请求最大限制。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:837 @@ -844,23 +1091,33 @@ msgstr "禁用 LDAP 分页控制。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:842 -msgid "When communicating with an LDAP server using SASL, specify the minimum security level necessary to establish the connection." +msgid "" +"When communicating with an LDAP server using SASL, specify the minimum " +"security level necessary to establish the connection." msgstr "当使用 SASL 与 LDAP 服务器通信时，请指定建立连接必需的最小安全级别。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:847 -msgid "Specify the number of group members that must be missing from the internal cache in order to trigger a dereference lookup." +msgid "" +"Specify the number of group members that must be missing from the internal " +"cache in order to trigger a dereference lookup." msgstr "指定了为触发解引用查询内部缓存必须缺失的组成员数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:853 -msgid "Specifies what checks to perform on server certificates in a TLS session, if any." +msgid "" +"Specifies what checks to perform on server certificates in a TLS session, if " +"any." msgstr "指定了若需要检查则在 TLS 会话中对服务器证书要进行的检查。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:858 -msgid "Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate Authorities that sssd will recognize." +msgid "" +"Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate " +"Authorities that sssd will recognize." msgstr "指定了包含全部 sssd 应认得的证书授权机构证书的文件。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:863 -msgid "Specifies the path of a directory that contains Certificate Authority certificates in separate individual files." +msgid "" +"Specifies the path of a directory that contains Certificate Authority " +"certificates in separate individual files." msgstr "指定了包含以几个单独文件形式存在的证书授权机构证书的文件夹路径。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:867 @@ -876,12 +1133,19 @@ msgstr "指定了可接受的密码套件。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:881 -msgid "Specifies that the id_provider connection must also use tls to protect the channel." +msgid "" +"Specifies that the id_provider connection must also use tls to protect the " +"channel." msgstr "指定了 id_provider 连接必须也使用 TLS 来保护通道。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:886 -msgid "Specifies that SSSD should attempt to map user and group IDs from the ldap_user_objectsid and ldap_group_objectsid attributes instead of relying on ldap_user_uid_number and ldap_group_gid_number." -msgstr "指定了 SSSD 应尝试从 ldap_user_objectsid 和 ldap_group_objectsid 属性映射用户和组 ID 而不是依赖于 ldap_user_uid_number 和 ldap_group_gid_number。" +msgid "" +"Specifies that SSSD should attempt to map user and group IDs from the " +"ldap_user_objectsid and ldap_group_objectsid attributes instead of relying on " +"ldap_user_uid_number and ldap_group_gid_number." +msgstr "" +"指定了 SSSD 应尝试从 ldap_user_objectsid 和 ldap_group_objectsid 属性映射用户和组 ID 而不是依赖于 " +"ldap_user_uid_number 和 ldap_group_gid_number。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:890 msgid "Specify the SASL mechanism to use." @@ -896,7 +1160,9 @@ msgstr "指定了要使用的 SASL 领域。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:905 -msgid "If set to true, the LDAP library would perform a reverse lookup to canonicalize the host name during a SASL bind." +msgid "" +"If set to true, the LDAP library would perform a reverse lookup to " +"canonicalize the host name during a SASL bind." msgstr "若设为真，LDAP 函数库在 SASL 绑定时应执行一次反向查询以规范化主机名。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:910 @@ -912,7 +1178,8 @@ msgstr "指定了使用 GSSAPI 时票据授权票据以秒计的生命周期。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:925 -msgid "Select the policy to evaluate the password expiration on the client side." +msgid "" +"Select the policy to evaluate the password expiration on the client side." msgstr "选择客户端方面用于评估密码有效期的策略。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:930 @@ -924,19 +1191,30 @@ msgstr "制定了当启用了服务发现时使用的服务名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:939 -msgid "Specifies the service name to use to find an LDAP server which allows password changes when service discovery is enabled." +msgid "" +"Specifies the service name to use to find an LDAP server which allows " +"password changes when service discovery is enabled." msgstr "指定了当启用了服务发现时用于查找允许密码变更的 LDAP 服务器的服务名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:944 -msgid "Specifies whether to update the ldap_user_shadow_last_change attribute with days since the Epoch after a password change operation." +msgid "" +"Specifies whether to update the ldap_user_shadow_last_change attribute with " +"days since the Epoch after a password change operation." msgstr "指定了在密码变更操作过后是否使用上次操作天数更新 ldap_user_shadow_last_change 属性。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:949 -msgid "If using access_provider = ldap and ldap_access_order = filter (default), this option is mandatory. It specifies an LDAP search filter criterion that must be met for the user to be granted access on this host." -msgstr "若使用了 access_provider = ldap 和 ldap_access_order = filter (默认)，则此选项是必需的。它指定了一个 LDAP 搜索过滤器标准，用户想要获得此主机的访问权就必须满足此标准。" +msgid "" +"If using access_provider = ldap and ldap_access_order = filter (default), " +"this option is mandatory. It specifies an LDAP search filter criterion that " +"must be met for the user to be granted access on this host." +msgstr "" +"若使用了 access_provider = ldap 和 ldap_access_order = filter (默认)，则此选项是必需的。它指定了一个 " +"LDAP 搜索过滤器标准，用户想要获得此主机的访问权就必须满足此标准。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:954 -msgid " With this option a client side evaluation of access control attributes can be enabled." +msgid "" +" With this option a client side evaluation of access control attributes can " +"be enabled." msgstr "使用此选项可启用客户端访问控制属性评估。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:960 @@ -948,11 +1226,15 @@ msgstr "指定了执行搜索时如何解引用别名。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:970 -msgid "Allows to retain local users as members of an LDAP group for servers that use the RFC2307 schema." +msgid "" +"Allows to retain local users as members of an LDAP group for servers that use " +"the RFC2307 schema." msgstr "针对使用 RFC2307 方案的服务器允许保留本地用户作为某个 LDAP 组的成员。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:993 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:997 -msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the Kerberos servers to which SSSD should connect, in the order of preference." +msgid "" +"Specifies the comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the " +"Kerberos servers to which SSSD should connect, in the order of preference." msgstr "指定了逗号分隔的 SSSD 应以优先级顺序连接的 Kerberos 服务器 IP 地址或主机名列表。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1002 @@ -960,7 +1242,9 @@ msgstr "Kerberos 领域的名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1007 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1012 -msgid "If the change password service is not running on the KDC, alternative servers can be defined here." +msgid "" +"If the change password service is not running on the KDC, alternative servers " +"can be defined here." msgstr "若 KDC 上未运行密码变更服务，则可在此定义替代服务器。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1017 @@ -972,27 +1256,39 @@ msgstr "用户机要缓存的位置。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1027 -msgid " Timeout in seconds after an online authentication request or change password request is aborted." +msgid "" +" Timeout in seconds after an online authentication request or change password " +"request is aborted." msgstr "在线认证请求或密码变更请求以秒计的超时。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1032 -msgid "Verify with the help of krb5_keytab that the TGT obtained has not been spoofed." +msgid "" +"Verify with the help of krb5_keytab that the TGT obtained has not been " +"spoofed." msgstr "在 krb5_keytab 的帮助下校验获取的票据授权票据未被冒名顶替。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1037 -msgid "The location of the keytab to use when validating credentials obtained from KDCs." +msgid "" +"The location of the keytab to use when validating credentials obtained from " +"KDCs." msgstr "当认证从 KDC 获取的机要资料时所用的密钥表的位置。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1042 -msgid "Store the password of the user if the provider is offline and use it to request a TGT when the provider comes online again." +msgid "" +"Store the password of the user if the provider is offline and use it to " +"request a TGT when the provider comes online again." msgstr "若提供者离线则存储用户密码并在提供者再次上线时用其请求票据授权票据。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1046 -msgid "Request a renewable ticket with a total lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." +msgid "" +"Request a renewable ticket with a total lifetime, given as an integer " +"immediately followed by a time unit." msgstr "请求可续期票据和其完整生命期，以整数后接时间单位的形式给出。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1050 -msgid "Request ticket with a with a lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." +msgid "" +"Request ticket with a with a lifetime, given as an integer immediately " +"followed by a time unit." msgstr "请求票据和其生命期，以整数后接时间单位的形式给出。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1054 @@ -1000,7 +1296,9 @@ msgstr "当票据授权票据应续期时两次检查间的秒数。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1059 -msgid "Enables flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) for Kerberos pre-authentication." +msgid "" +"Enables flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) for Kerberos " +"pre-authentication." msgstr "为 Kerberos 预认证启用灵活认证安全隧道 (FAST)。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1063 @@ -1017,11 +1315,16 @@ msgstr "指定了活动目录域的名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1085 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1089 -msgid "The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the AD servers to which SSSD should connect in order of preference." +msgid "" +"The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the AD servers to " +"which SSSD should connect in order of preference." msgstr "以优先级顺序指定了 SSSD 应连接的活动目录服务器的以逗号分隔的 IP 地址或主机名列表。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1093 -msgid "Optional. May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name used in the Active Directory domain to identify this host." +msgid "" +"Optional. May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the " +"fully qualified name used in the Active Directory domain to identify this " +"host." msgstr "可选。可以在 hostname(5) 未反映在活动目录域中用于识别此主机的完全限定名称的机器上设置。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1097 @@ -1029,11 +1332,15 @@ msgstr "覆盖用户主文件夹。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1110 -msgid " Specifies the lower bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgid "" +" Specifies the lower bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping " +"Active Directory user and group SIDs." msgstr "指定了用于映射活动目录用户和组 SID 的 POSIX ID 范围的下界。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1115 -msgid "Specifies the upper bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgid "" +"Specifies the upper bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active " +"Directory user and group SIDs." msgstr "指定了用于映射活动目录用户和组 SID 的 POSIX ID 范围的上界。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1120 @@ -1049,7 +1356,9 @@ msgstr "指定默认域的名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1133 -msgid "Changes the behavior of the ID-mapping algorithm to behave more similarly to winbind's “idmap_autorid” algorithm." +msgid "" +"Changes the behavior of the ID-mapping algorithm to behave more similarly to " +"winbind's “idmap_autorid” algorithm." msgstr "修改 ID 映射算法的行为以与 winbind 的 \"idmap_autorid\" 算法更加相似。" #. The Active Directory domain section @@ -1058,15 +1367,21 @@ msgstr "指定 IPA 域的名称。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1149 -msgid "The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the IPA servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." +msgid "" +"The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the IPA servers to " +"which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." msgstr "指定了逗号分隔的 SSSD 应以优先级顺序连接的 IPA 服务器 IP 地址或主机名列表。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1153 -msgid "May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name." +msgid "" +"May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully " +"qualified name." msgstr "可以在 hostname(5) 未反映完全限定名称的机器上设置。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1158 -msgid "This option tells SSSD to automatically update the DNS server built into FreeIPA v2 with the IP address of this client." +msgid "" +"This option tells SSSD to automatically update the DNS server built into " +"FreeIPA v2 with the IP address of this client." msgstr "此选项告知 SSSD 使用此客户端的 IP 地址自动更新被构建成 FreeIPA v2 的 DNS 服务器。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1163 @@ -1074,7 +1389,8 @@ msgstr "更新客户端 DNS 记录时应用的 TTL。" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1167 -msgid "Choose the interface whose IP address should be used for dynamic DNS updates." +msgid "" +"Choose the interface whose IP address should be used for dynamic DNS updates." msgstr "选择其 IP 地址应用于动态 DNS 更新的接口。" #. end Export Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/auth-server.zh_CN.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/auth-server.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 09:48:57 UTC (rev 90542) +++ trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/auth-server.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 10:00:27 UTC (rev 90543) @@ -4,9 +4,9 @@ "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 16:20+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-06-24 15:11+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 17:17+0800\n" "Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <marguerite@opensuse.org>\n" -"Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <opensuse-zh@opensuse.org>\n" +"Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_CN\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -95,7 +95,9 @@ #. error popup #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:58 #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:228 -msgid "The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings later in the installed system." +msgid "" +"The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings later " +"in the installed system." msgstr "LDAP 数据库已创建。稍后您可以在安装好的系统中修改其设置。" #. y2error( "sysconfig var is '%1'", SCR::Read( .sysconfig.openldap.OPENLDAP_REGISTER_SLP ) ); @@ -108,7 +110,9 @@ msgstr "[手动设置]" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:106 -msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to continue." +msgid "" +"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to " +"continue." msgstr "无法撷取系统 root 密码。请设置一个 LDAP 服务器密码来继续。" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:112 @@ -199,7 +203,9 @@ msgstr "YaST2 未安装必需软件包则无法继续配置。" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:309 -msgid "OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has finished." +msgid "" +"OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has " +"finished." msgstr "OpenLDAP 复制设置失败。请在安装结束后重新配置。" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:344 @@ -222,8 +228,10 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:107 msgid "" -"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not running.\n" -"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do you \n" +"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not " +"running.\n" +"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do " +"you \n" "want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" "您有一个已有配置，但 LDAP 服务器当前未运行。\n" @@ -310,7 +318,9 @@ msgstr "LDAP 服务器未运行。" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:199 -msgid "Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want to create a new configuration from scratch?" +msgid "" +"Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want " +"to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "您想要立即启动并重新读取它的配置数据，还是想要从头创建一个新配置？" #. get helps page @@ -520,7 +530,9 @@ #. Doing these checks during installation will #. most probably fail #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1277 -msgid "Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider server.\n" +msgid "" +"Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider " +"server.\n" msgstr "打开到提供者服务器上的 \"cn=config\" 数据库的连接失败。\n" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1280 @@ -560,12 +572,15 @@ msgstr "主控服务器上的复制配置表明它已经扮演者复制使用者的角色了。\n" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1383 -msgid "Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." +msgid "" +"Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." msgstr "当前不支持设置 cn=config 的层叠复制。" #. 2. Verify that the binddn/credential combination acutally works #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1410 -msgid "Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication configuration on the provider server failed.\n" +msgid "" +"Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication " +"configuration on the provider server failed.\n" msgstr "检查提供者服务器上的复制配置中定义的认证资料失败。\n" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1413 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1971 @@ -627,7 +642,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:21 msgid "" "<p>Select <b>Yes</b> if the LDAP server should be started automatically as \n" -"part of the boot process. Select <b>No</b> if the LDAP server should not be started. Note:\n" +"part of the boot process. Select <b>No</b> if the LDAP server should not be " +"started. Note:\n" "After selecting <b>No</b>, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>若 LDAP 服务器应作为引导过程的一部分被自动启动，请选择<b>是</b>。\n" @@ -644,16 +660,20 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:30 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAP</b> is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured communication\n" -"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate configured.</p>" +"<p><b>LDAP</b> is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured " +"communication\n" +"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate " +"configured.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>LDAP</b> 是端口 389 之上的标准 LDAP 接口。当您配置了服务器证书时，也可以\n" "通过 StartTLS 作业使用 TLS/SSL 安全通信。</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:33 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAPS</b> enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL protected\n" -"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" +"<p><b>LDAPS</b> enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL " +"protected\n" +"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate " +"configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>LDAPS</b> 在端口 636 上为 SSL 安全连接启用了 \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" 接口。\n" "此选项仅在您配置了服务器证书 (见 \"全局设置\"/\"TLS 设置\") 时才有效。\n" @@ -684,13 +704,17 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:49 msgid "" -"<p>Choose the <b>Database</b> from <b>hdb</b> <b>bdb</b> and <b>mdb</b>. <b>Hdb</b> is a\n" -"variant of the <b>bdb</b> backend that uses a hierarchical database layout and\n" +"<p>Choose the <b>Database</b> from <b>hdb</b> <b>bdb</b> and <b>mdb</b>. <b>" +"Hdb</b> is a\n" +"variant of the <b>bdb</b> backend that uses a hierarchical database layout " +"and\n" "supports subtree renames. Otherwise it is identical to <b>bdb</b>. A\n" "<b>hdb</b>-Database needs a larger <b>idlcachesize</b> than a\n" "<b>bdb</b>-Database for a good search performance.\n" -"<b>mdb</b>-Database uses OpenLDAP's Lightning Memory-Mapped DB (LMDB) library to store data.\n" -"It similar to the <b>hdb</b> backend but it is both more space-efficient and more execution-efficient.</p>\n" +"<b>mdb</b>-Database uses OpenLDAP's Lightning Memory-Mapped DB (LMDB) library " +"to store data.\n" +"It similar to the <b>hdb</b> backend but it is both more space-efficient and " +"more execution-efficient.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>从 <b>hdb</b> <b>bdb</b> 和 <b>mdb</b> 中选择<b>数据库</b>。\n" "<b>Hdb</b> 是 <b>bdb</b> 后端的一个变种，使用分层数据库布局并支持子树重命名。除此之外它和 <b>bdb</b>无甚差别。\n" @@ -706,11 +730,16 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:61 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Administrator DN</b> along with a <b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> \n" -"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and other \n" -"administrative limit restrictions. Checking <b>Append Base DN</b> appends the \n" -"<b>Base DN</b> entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example,dc=com</tt>\n" -"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective Administrator DN\n" +"<p>The <b>Administrator DN</b> along with a <b>LDAP Administrator Password</b>" +" \n" +"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and " +"other \n" +"administrative limit restrictions. Checking <b>Append Base DN</b> appends the " +"\n" +"<b>Base DN</b> entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>" +"dc=example,dc=com</tt>\n" +"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective " +"Administrator DN\n" "of <tt>c=Admin,dc=example,dc=com</tt>.</p> " msgstr "" "<p><b>管理员判别名</b>和<b>LDAP 管理员密码</b>指定了\n" @@ -722,7 +751,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:69 msgid "" "<p>If this wizard was started during installation, the \n" -"<b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> is initially set to the system's root password\n" +"<b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> is initially set to the system's root " +"password\n" "entered earlier in the installation process.</p> " msgstr "" "<p>若此助手在安装期间启动，初始 <b>LDAP 管理员密码</b>\n" @@ -782,15 +812,19 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:101 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN automatically\n" +"<p>Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN " +"automatically\n" "with <b>Append Base DN</b>.</p>" msgstr "<p>输入完整判别名或仅输入第一部分然后使用<b>追加基本判别名</b>自动追加基本判别名。</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:104 msgid "" -"<p>To change the password for the administrator account, click <b>Change Password</b>.\n" -"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the <b>Password Encryption</b>.\n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been set in the configuration.</p>\n" +"<p>To change the password for the administrator account, click <b>Change " +"Password</b>.\n" +"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the <b>Password " +"Encryption</b>.\n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been " +"set in the configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>要修改管理员账户的密码，请点击<b>修改密码</b>。\n" "一个弹窗会提示您输入新密码并选择<b>密码加密</b>。\n" @@ -798,17 +832,24 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:109 msgid "" -"<p>With the <b>Entry Cache</b> and <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> you can adjust\n" -"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The <b>Entry Cache</b> defines the number of entries\n" -"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough RAM) this number\n" -"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> \n" -"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially HDB-Databases require a\n" -"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the entry cache as a rule of\n" +"<p>With the <b>Entry Cache</b> and <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> you can " +"adjust\n" +"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The <b>Entry Cache</b> defines the " +"number of entries\n" +"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough " +"RAM) this number\n" +"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The <b>Index " +"Cache (IDL cache)</b> \n" +"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially " +"HDB-Databases require a\n" +"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the " +"entry cache as a rule of\n" "thumbs).</p>" msgstr "" "<p>您可以通过<b>条目缓存</b>和<b>索引缓存 (IDL 缓存)</b>调整 OpenLDAP 内部缓存的大小。\n" "<b>条目缓存</b>定义了 OpenLADP 在内存中保存的条目缓存的数目。若可行的话 (内存够用)，此数目应大到足够在内存中保存整个数据库。\n" -"<b>索引缓存 (IDL 缓存)</b>用于加速对已索引属性的搜索。通常，尤其是 HDB 数据库需要一个很大的 IDL 缓存来提升搜索性能。(惯例是三倍于条目缓存的大小)。</p>" +"<b>索引缓存 (IDL 缓存)</b>用于加速对已索引属性的搜索。通常，尤其是 HDB 数据库需要一个很大的 IDL " +"缓存来提升搜索性能。(惯例是三倍于条目缓存的大小)。</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:118 msgid "<h3>Password Policy Settings</h3>" @@ -822,10 +863,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:122 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Hash Clear Text Passwords</b> to specify that the OpenLDAP server\n" -"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests before storing them\n" -"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, but may be\n" -"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify extended operation \n" +"<p>Check <b>Hash Clear Text Passwords</b> to specify that the OpenLDAP " +"server\n" +"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests before " +"storing them\n" +"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, " +"but may be\n" +"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify " +"extended operation \n" "to manage passwords.</p> " msgstr "" "<p>勾选<b>加密明文密码</b>将指定 OpenLDAP 服务器应先加密出现在添加和修改请求中的明文密码然后再存储进数据库中。\n" @@ -844,12 +889,15 @@ "感的站点不应该启用此选项。</p>\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:136 -msgid "<p>Enter the name of the default policy object in <b>Default Policy Object DN</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Enter the name of the default policy object in <b>Default Policy Object " +"DN</b>.</p>" msgstr "<p>在<b>默认策略对象判别名</b>中输入默认策略对象的名称。</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:139 msgid "" -"<p>Create or change the default policy by clicking <b>Edit Policy</b>. You may\n" +"<p>Create or change the default policy by clicking <b>Edit Policy</b>. You " +"may\n" "be asked to enter the LDAP administrator password afterwards to allow the\n" "Policy Object being read from the server.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -866,14 +914,17 @@ msgstr "<p>修改 hdb 或 bdb 数据库的索引选项。</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:146 -msgid "<p>The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index defined.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index " +"defined.</p>" msgstr "<p>此表格显示了目前定义了索引的属性的列表。</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:149 msgid "" "<p>Indexes are used by OpenLDAP to improve search performance on specific\n" "types of searches. Indexes should be configured corresponding to the most\n" -"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different types\n" +"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different " +"types\n" "of indexes.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>索引被 OpenLDAP 用来提高特定类型搜索的搜索性能。\n" @@ -883,7 +934,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:155 msgid "" "<p><b>Presence</b>: This index is used for searches with presence filters\n" -"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be configured\n" +"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be " +"configured\n" "for attributes that occur rarely in the database.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>存在</b>：此索引用于使用存在过滤器进行的搜索。\n" @@ -893,7 +945,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:160 msgid "" "<p><b>Equality</b>: This index is used for searches with equality filters \n" -"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An <b>Equality</b> index\n" +"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An <b>Equality</b> " +"index\n" "should always be configured with the <tt>objectclass</tt> attribute.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>相等</b>：此索引用于使用相等过滤器进行的搜索\n" @@ -920,7 +973,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:173 msgid "" -"<p>Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly added\n" +"<p>Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly " +"added\n" "indexes will get active on a database. After the configuration has been\n" "written to the server, a background task will start to generate the indexing\n" "information for the database.</p>\n" @@ -958,7 +1012,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose target\n" "definition (DN, filter and attributes) matches the entry being\n" -"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, using\n" +"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, " +"using\n" "the <b>Up</b> and <b>Down</b> buttons.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>OpenLDAP 的访问控制评估在匹配到第一条目标定义 \n" @@ -972,9 +1027,11 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:202 msgid "" -"<p>Select the \"<b>Enable ldapsync provider for this database</b>\" checkbox, if you want to \n" +"<p>Select the \"<b>Enable ldapsync provider for this database</b>\" checkbox, " +"if you want to \n" "be able to replicate the currently selected database to another server.</p>" -msgstr "<p>若您想要能够复制当前所选数据库到另一个服务器，请选择 \"<b>启用此数据库作为 ldapsync 提供者</b>\" 复选框。</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>若您想要能够复制当前所选数据库到另一个服务器，请选择 \"<b>启用此数据库作为 ldapsync 提供者</b>\" 复选框。</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:205 msgid "<h4>Checkpoint Settings</h4>" @@ -982,11 +1039,16 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:206 msgid "" -"<p>Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator (stored\n" -"in the \"<i>contextCSN</i>\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is synced\n" -"to the database after the number of write \"<i>Operations</i>\" you specify or\n" -"after more than the specified \"<i>Minutes</i>\" have passed since the indicator\n" -"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator is\n" +"<p>Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator " +"(stored\n" +"in the \"<i>contextCSN</i>\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is " +"synced\n" +"to the database after the number of write \"<i>Operations</i>\" you specify " +"or\n" +"after more than the specified \"<i>Minutes</i>\" have passed since the " +"indicator\n" +"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator " +"is\n" "only written after a clean shutdown. Writing it more often can result in\n" "a faster startup time after an unclean shutdown but might result in a small\n" "performance hit in environments with many LDAP write operations.</p>\n" @@ -1002,10 +1064,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:217 msgid "" -"<p>Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write operations\n" -"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in the session log. \n" -"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"<i>refreshOnly</i>\" replication. In \n" -"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master server.</p>" +"<p>Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write " +"operations\n" +"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in " +"the session log. \n" +"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"<i>refreshOnly</i>\" " +"replication. In \n" +"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master " +"server.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>配置一个内存会话日志以记录数据库写操作的信息。在会话日志中指定应记录多少写操作。\n" "只有在“<i>只能刷新</i>”复制模式下配置会话日志才有用。在这种情况下它可以加速复制和\n" @@ -1033,7 +1099,8 @@ "server here. Select the protocol to use (<b>ldap</b> or <b>ldaps</b>) and\n" "enter the fully qualified hostname of the master server. It is important to\n" "use the fully qualified hostname to verify the master server's TLS/SSL\n" -"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-standard\n" +"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using " +"non-standard\n" "ldap ports.\n" msgstr "" "在此输入到主服务器的复制连接的连接细节。选择要使用的协议 (<b>ldap</b> 或 <b>ldaps</b>)\n" @@ -1073,8 +1140,10 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:252 msgid "" -"<p>Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to authenticate against the master.\n" -"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated database on the master.</p>\n" +"<p>Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to " +"authenticate against the master.\n" +"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated " +"database on the master.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>指定从属服务器应用于同主服务器认证的判别名和密码。\n" "指定的判别名要有主服务器上被复制数据库全部条目的读取权限。</p>\n" @@ -1087,8 +1156,10 @@ msgid "" "<p>As the slave database is readonly, the slave server will answer write\n" "operations with an LDAP referral. \n" -"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can configure a different update referral here.\n" -"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for the\n" +"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can " +"configure a different update referral here.\n" +"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for " +"the\n" "slave server is as slave server too. </p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>由于从属数据库是只读的，从属服务器将以 LDAP 转发回应写入操作。\n" @@ -1139,11 +1210,15 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 1 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:289 -msgid "<p>With <b>Start LDAP Server Yes or No</b>, start or stop the LDAP server.</p> " +msgid "" +"<p>With <b>Start LDAP Server Yes or No</b>, start or stop the LDAP server.</p>" +" " msgstr "<>使用<b>启动 LDAP 服务器是或否</b>，可启动或停止 LDAP 服务器。</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:292 -msgid "<p>If you select <b>Yes</b>, click <b>Next</b> to start the configuration wizard.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>If you select <b>Yes</b>, click <b>Next</b> to start the configuration " +"wizard.</p>" msgstr "<p>若您选择<b>是</b>，请点击<b>下一步</b>来启动配置助手。</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:295 @@ -1154,12 +1229,15 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:299 -msgid "<p>Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios are available:</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios " +"are available:</p>" msgstr "<p>请选择您想要设置的 LDAP 服务器的类型。有以下场景可用：</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:302 msgid "" -"<p><b>Stand-alone server</b>: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server with\n" +"<p><b>Stand-alone server</b>: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server " +"with\n" "no preparations for replication.</p>\n" msgstr "<p><b>独立服务器</b>：设置一个单一的不准备复制的独立 OpenLDAP 服务器。</p>\n" @@ -1173,7 +1251,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:308 msgid "" -"<p><b>Replica slave server</b>: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that replicates all its data,\n" +"<p><b>Replica slave server</b>: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that " +"replicates all its data,\n" "including configuration, from a master server.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>复制从属服务器</b>：设置一个从主服务器复制包括配置在内的\n" @@ -1199,7 +1278,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>Check <b>Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface</b>, to enable the server\n" "to accept LDAPS connections on port 636. If not checked, OpenLDAP will only\n" -"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.</p>\n" +"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.</p>" +"\n" msgstr "" "<p>勾选<b>启用 LDAP over SSL (ldaps) 接口</b>，来使服务器接受端口 636 上的 LDAPS 连接。\n" "若未勾选，OpenLDAP 将只支持通过 StartTLS 扩展操作的 TLS 加密连接。</p>\n" @@ -1207,9 +1287,11 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:326 msgid "" "<p>If you already have a common server certificate installed using the\n" -"corresponding YaST Module, check <b>Use common Server Certificate</b> so that\n" +"corresponding YaST Module, check <b>Use common Server Certificate</b> so " +"that\n" "the OpenLDAP server uses this certificate.</p>\n" -msgstr "<p>若您已经通过相关 YaST 模块安装了通用服务器证书，请勾选<b>使用通用服务器证书</b>以让 OpenLDAP 服务器使用此证书。</p>\n" +msgstr "" +"<p>若您已经通过相关 YaST 模块安装了通用服务器证书，请勾选<b>使用通用服务器证书</b>以让 OpenLDAP 服务器使用此证书。</p>\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:331 msgid "<h4>Import Certificate</h4>" @@ -1218,10 +1300,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:332 msgid "" "<p>If you have no common server certificate or you want OpenLDAP to use a\n" -"different certificate, enter the file names of the <b>CA Certificate File</b>,\n" -"<b>Certificate File</b> and <b>Certificate Key File</b> into the corresponding\n" +"different certificate, enter the file names of the <b>CA Certificate File</b>" +",\n" +"<b>Certificate File</b> and <b>Certificate Key File</b> into the " +"corresponding\n" "textfields.</p>\n" -msgstr "<p>若您没有通用服务器证书或者您想要 OpenLDAP 使用一个不同的证书，请输入 <b>CA 证书文件</b>、<b>证书文件</b>和<b>证书密钥文件</b>的文件名到相关文本框。</p>\n" +msgstr "" +"<p>若您没有通用服务器证书或者您想要 OpenLDAP 使用一个不同的证书，请输入 <b>CA 证书文件</b>、<b>证书文件</b>和<b>" +"证书密钥文件</b>的文件名到相关文本框。</p>\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:338 msgid "" @@ -1237,8 +1323,10 @@ #. Tree Item Dialog "schema" 1/ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:346 msgid "" -"<p>Add schema files in this dialog. Press <b>Add</b> to open a file dialog in which to choose\n" -"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not support the removal of \n" +"<p>Add schema files in this dialog. Press <b>Add</b> to open a file dialog in " +"which to choose\n" +"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not " +"support the removal of \n" "Schema Data</p>" msgstr "" "<p>在此对话框中添加方案文件。\n" @@ -1254,7 +1342,9 @@ #. Tree Item Dialog "allow" 1/1 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:356 -msgid "<p>Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or disallow:</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or " +"disallow:</p>" msgstr "<p>选择 OpenLDAP 服务器应允许或不允许的特殊功能：</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:359 @@ -1263,7 +1353,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:360 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAPv2 Bind Requests</b>: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind requests.\n" +"<p><b>LDAPv2 Bind Requests</b>: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind " +"requests.\n" "Note that OpenLDAP does not truly implement LDAPv2.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>LDAPv2 绑定请求</b>：使服务器接受 LDAPv2 绑定请求。\n" @@ -1271,8 +1362,10 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:363 msgid "" -"<p><b>Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty</b>: To allow anonymous bind when \n" -"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not present) </p>" +"<p><b>Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty</b>: To allow anonymous bind " +"when \n" +"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not " +"present) </p>" msgstr "<p><b>当机要资料非空时允许匿名绑定</b>：当机要资料非空时 (例如提供了密码但未提供绑定判别名) 允许匿名绑定</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:366 @@ -1283,7 +1376,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:369 msgid "" -"<p><b>Unauthenticated Update Operations to process</b>: To allow unauthenticated\n" +"<p><b>Unauthenticated Update Operations to process</b>: To allow " +"unauthenticated\n" "(anonymous) update operations to be processed. They are still subject to\n" "access controls and other administrative limits.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1313,9 +1407,12 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:383 msgid "" "<p><b>Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation\n" -"receipt</b>: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection back\n" +"receipt</b>: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection " +"back\n" "to the anonymous state when receiving the StartTLS operation.</p>\n" -msgstr "<p><b>禁用收到 StartTLS 操作时将会话强制为匿名状态</b>：服务器在接收 StartTLS 操作时不再强制认证的连接回到匿名状态。</p>\n" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>禁用收到 StartTLS 操作时将会话强制为匿名状态</b>：服务器在接收 StartTLS 操作时不再强制认证的连接回到匿名状态。</p>" +"\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:388 msgid "" @@ -1330,9 +1427,11 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:394 msgid "" "<p>This lists shows all configured databases. The databases with the type\n" -"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The \"Frontend\"\n" +"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The " +"\"Frontend\"\n" "database is use to configure global access control restrictions and overlays\n" -"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration of\n" +"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration " +"of\n" "the LDAP server itself.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>此列表显示了全部配置过的数据库。类型为 \"前端\" 和 \"配置\" 的数据库代表特殊内部数据库。\n" @@ -1346,7 +1445,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:403 msgid "" -"<p>To delete a database, select a database from the list and press <b>Delete Database...</b>.\n" +"<p>To delete a database, select a database from the list and press <b>Delete " +"Database...</b>.\n" "You cannot delete the \"config\" and \"frontend\" databases.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>要删除一个数据库，请从列表中选择数据库并按<b>删除数据库...</b>。\n" @@ -1354,59 +1454,80 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:406 msgid "" -"<p>Enter a password for the configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") here. This is required to make\n" +"<p>Enter a password for the configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") " +"here. This is required to make\n" "the configuration database accessible remotely.</p>" msgstr "<p>在此输入配置数据库 (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") 的密码。这是让配置数据库可远程访问必须的。</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:409 msgid "" -"<p>If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select the \"<b>Prepare for MirrorMode replication</b>\"\n" -"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as needed for MirrorMode replication.</p>\n" +"<p>If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select the " +"\"<b>Prepare for MirrorMode replication</b>\"\n" +"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as needed " +"for MirrorMode replication.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>若服务器应该参与镜像模式设置，请选择 \"<b>准备镜像模式复制</b>\" 复选框。\n" "这会确保生成镜像模式复制所需要的 serverID 属性。</p>\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:412 msgid "" -"<p>To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master server. Please enter the master\n" -"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"<i>ldap</i>\" or \"<i>ldaps</i>\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" +"<p>To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master " +"server. Please enter the master\n" +"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"<i>ldap</i>\" or \"<i>ldaps<" +"/i>\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" "for the master's configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\").</p>" -msgstr "<p>为设置从属服务器需要从主服务器查询一些细节。请输入主服务器的主机名，按需调整协议 (\"<i>ldap</i>\" 或 \"<i>ldaps</i>\") 和端口号并输入主服务器配置数据库 (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") 的密码。</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>为设置从属服务器需要从主服务器查询一些细节。请输入主服务器的主机名，按需调整协议 (\"<i>ldap</i>\" 或 \"<i>ldaps</i>" +"\") 和端口号并输入主服务器配置数据库 (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") 的密码。</p>" #. ########## kerberos #. Help text: basic settings 1/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:419 -msgid "<p>Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your Kerberos server.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your " +"Kerberos server.</p>" msgstr "<p>请指定您的 Kerberos 服务器的<big>领域</big>和<big>主密码</big>。</p>" #. Help text: basic settings 2/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:423 -msgid "<p>Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.</p>\n" +msgid "" +"<p>Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is to " +"use upper-case letters as in your domain name.</p>\n" msgstr "<p>虽然您的 Kerberos 领域可以为任意 ASCII 字符串，最好使用大写字母作为您的域名。</p>\n" #. advanced item help: database_name #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:427 -msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this realm.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this " +"realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>此字符串指定了此领域的 Kerberos 数据库的位置。</p>" #. advanced item help: acl_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:431 -msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file " +"that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database.</p>" msgstr "<p>此字符串指定了 kadmin 用于确定数据库上的实体的权限的访问控制列表 (ACL) 文件的位置。</p>" #. advanced item help: admin_keytab #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:435 -msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to authenticate to the database.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to " +"authenticate to the database.</p>" msgstr "<p>此字符串指定了 kadmin 用于与数据库认证的 keytab 文件的位置。</p>" #. advanced item help: default_principal_expiration #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:439 -msgid "<p>This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals created in this realm.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals " +"created in this realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>此绝对时间指定了此领域中创建的实体的默认过期日。</p>" #. advanced item help principal_flags 1/13 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:443 -msgid "<p>These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in this realm.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in " +"this realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>这些旗标指定了此领域中创建的实体的默认属性。</p>" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:446 @@ -1451,7 +1572,9 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 6/13 :Enable user-to-user authentication #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:466 -msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." +msgid "" +"Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another " +"user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." msgstr "启用此旗标来允许实体为另一个用户获取会话密钥，允许此实体进行用户到用户认证。" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:469 @@ -1460,8 +1583,14 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 7/13 :Requires preauth #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:471 -msgid "If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket set." -msgstr "若在客户端实体上启用了此旗标，在接受票据前该实体需要与 KDC 进行预认证。若您在服务实体上启用了此旗标，此实体的服务票据将仅签发给拥有设置了预认证票据的票据授权票据的客户端。" +msgid "" +"If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to " +"preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this " +"flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will only " +"be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket set." +msgstr "" +"若在客户端实体上启用了此旗标，在接受票据前该实体需要与 KDC 进行预认证。若您在服务实体上启用了此旗标，此实体的服务票据将仅签发给拥有设置了预认证票据的票" +"据授权票据的客户端。" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:474 msgid "Requires hwauth" @@ -1469,7 +1598,9 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 8/13 :Requires hwauth #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:476 -msgid "If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using a hardware device before receiving any tickets." +msgid "" +"If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using a " +"hardware device before receiving any tickets." msgstr "若启用了此旗标，在接收票据前实体需要使用硬件设备进行预认证。" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:479 @@ -1478,7 +1609,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 9/13 :Allow service #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:481 -msgid "Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this principal." +msgid "" +"Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this principal." msgstr "启用此旗标来允许 KDC 为此实体签发服务票据。" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:484 @@ -1487,7 +1619,10 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 10/13 :Allow tgs request #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:486 -msgid "Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was used to obtain the TGT." +msgid "" +"Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a " +"ticket-granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that " +"was used to obtain the TGT." msgstr "启用此旗标将允许实体基于票据授权票据来获取票据，而不是重复用于获取票据授权票据的认证过程。" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:489 @@ -1496,7 +1631,10 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 11/13 :Allow tickets #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:491 -msgid "Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within this realm." +msgid "" +"Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this " +"principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within " +"this realm." msgstr "启用此旗标意味着 KDC 将为此实体签发票据。禁用此旗标实质上将禁用此领域中的实体。" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:494 @@ -1514,33 +1652,51 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 13/13 :Password changing service #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:499 -msgid "If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password authentication." -msgstr "若启用了此旗标，它将标记此实体为需要密码变更服务。这应只在特殊情况下使用，例如，若某个用户的密码过期了，该用户需要不通过常规密码认证就能为该实体获取票据以便修改密码。" +msgid "" +"If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change " +"service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a " +"user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that " +"principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password " +"authentication." +msgstr "" +"若启用了此旗标，它将标记此实体为需要密码变更服务。这应只在特殊情况下使用，例如，若某个用户的密码过期了，该用户需要不通过常规密码认证就能为该实体获取票据以便" +"修改密码。" #. advanced item help : dict_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:503 -msgid "<p>The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy assigned to the principal, no check will be done.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are not " +"allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy " +"assigned to the principal, no check will be done.</p>" msgstr "<p>此字符串定位了含有不允许用作密码的字符串的字典文件。若未设置此标签或该实体未指派策略，将不会进行检查。</p>" #. advanced item help : kadmind_port #. advanced item help : kpasswd_port #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:507 src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:511 -msgid "<p>This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens for this realm.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens " +"for this realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>此端口号指定了 kadmind 守护进程监听此领域的端口。</p>" #. advanced item help : key_stash_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:515 -msgid "<p>This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored with kdb5_stash.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored " +"with kdb5_stash.</p>" msgstr "<p>此字符串指定了使用 kdb5_stash 存储主密钥的位置。</p>" #. advanced item help : kdc_ports #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:519 -msgid "<p>This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this realm.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this " +"realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>此字符串指定了 KDC 监听此领域的端口列表。</p>" #. advanced item help : master_key_name #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:523 -msgid "<p>This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the master key. The default value is K/M.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the master " +"key. The default value is K/M.</p>" msgstr "<p>此字符串指定了与主密钥关联的实体的名称。默认值是 K/M。</p>" #. advanced item help : master_key_type @@ -1550,47 +1706,70 @@ #. advanced item help : max_life #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:531 -msgid "<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be valid for in this realm.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " +"valid for in this realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>此差异时间指定了票据可在此领域中有效的最大时间周期。</p>" #. advanced item help : max_renew_life #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:535 -msgid "<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be renewed for in this realm.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " +"renewed for in this realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>此差异时间指定了票据可在此领域中续期的最大时间周期。</p>" #. advanced item help : supported_enctypes #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:539 -msgid "<p>A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt " +"combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>一个为此领域指定了实体的默认密钥/盐化排列的密钥/盐化字符串列表。</p>" #. advanced item help : kdc_supported_enctypes #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:543 -msgid "<p>Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this " +"realm.</p>" msgstr "<p>为此领域指定了允许的实体的密钥/盐化排列。</p>" #. advanced item help : reject_bad_transit #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:547 -msgid "<p>Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file</p>" -msgstr "<p>指定了是否应检查跨领域票据的所跨领域列表与根据领域名称计算的跨越路径和其 krb5.conf 文件的[capaths] 部分的匹配度。</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm " +"tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm " +"names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>指定了是否应检查跨领域票据的所跨领域列表与根据领域名称计算的跨越路径和其 krb5.conf 文件的[capaths] 部分的匹配度。</p>" #. advanced item help : ldap_conns_per_server #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:551 -msgid "<p>This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be maintained via the LDAP server.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be " +"maintained via the LDAP server.</p>" msgstr "<p>这个 LDAP 特殊标签表示将通过 LDAP 服务器维护的连接的数目。</p>" #. advanced item help : ldap_service_password_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:555 -msgid "<p>This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed passwords " +"for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers.</p>" msgstr "<p>这个 LDAP 特定标签表示包含用于启动 Kerberos 服务器的对象的加密密码的文件。</p>" #. advanced item help : kdb_subtrees #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:559 -msgid "<p>Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).</p><p>The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under the subtree.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The " +"list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).</p><p>The " +"search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under the " +"subtree.</p>" msgstr "<p>指定了包含某领域实体的子树列表。该列表包含了由冒号分隔的子树对象判别名。</p><p>搜索范围指定了在子树中搜索实体的范围。</p>" #. advanced item help : kdb_containerref #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:563 -msgid "<p>Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a realm, the principals will be created in the realm container.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a " +"realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a " +"realm, the principals will be created in the realm container.</p>" msgstr "<p>指定了将在其中创建某领域的实体的容器对象的判别名。若该容器引用尚未配置领域，则领域实体将被创建在领域容器中。</p>" #. advanced item help : kdb_maxtktlife @@ -1600,7 +1779,9 @@ #. advanced item help : kdb_maxrenewlife #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:571 -msgid "<p>Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm.<" +"/p>" msgstr "<p>在此领域为实体的票据指定最大续期时间。</p>" #. ################################################################################# @@ -1925,7 +2106,9 @@ msgstr "服务器 URL" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:50 -msgid "This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." +msgid "" +"This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the " +"standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." msgstr "服务器没有设为镜像模式节点。点击 \"下一步\" 启动标准 OpenLDAP 配置向导。" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:85 @@ -1933,7 +2116,8 @@ msgstr "OpenLDAP 镜像模式概览" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:127 -msgid "Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" +msgid "" +"Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" msgstr "不能删除您启动此 YaST 模块的主机。\n" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:130 @@ -2245,7 +2429,9 @@ msgstr "选择禁用旗标(&D)：" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:197 -msgid "Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous directory access)" +msgid "" +"Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous " +"directory access)" msgstr "禁用接受匿名绑定请求 (不禁止匿名文件夹访问)" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:201 @@ -2253,7 +2439,8 @@ msgstr "禁用简单绑定认证" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:204 -msgid "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" +msgid "" +"Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" msgstr "禁用收到 StartTLS 操作时讲会话强制为匿名状态" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:210 @@ -2388,10 +2575,9 @@ msgstr "修改管理员密码" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:410 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Use Kerberos" msgid "Update Kerberos Stash" -msgstr "使用 Kerberos" +msgstr "更新 Kerberos 密钥存储文件" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:452 msgid "Add Index" @@ -2772,7 +2958,8 @@ msgstr "检查提供者的 LDAPsync 能力失败。" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1995 -msgid "Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" +msgid "" +"Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" msgstr "请验证目标服务器是否已启用为一个 LDAPsync 提供者" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2094 @@ -2999,7 +3186,9 @@ msgstr "正在更新默认密码策略对象" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1830 -msgid "Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take some minutes)" +msgid "" +"Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take " +"some minutes)" msgstr "正在等待 OpenLDAP 后台索引任务完成 (这可能花费几分钟)" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1831 @@ -3019,7 +3208,8 @@ msgstr "创建密码策略对象失败。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1953 -msgid "An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to finish.\n" +msgid "" +"An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to finish.\n" msgstr "等待 OpenLDAP 数据库索引器完成时发生了一个错误。\n" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1954 @@ -3121,7 +3311,9 @@ msgstr "无法确定自身的完全限定主机名。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2860 -msgid "A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its own fully qualified hostname." +msgid "" +"A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its own " +"fully qualified hostname." msgstr "复制主服务器不能在不知道它自身的完全限定主机名的情况下正常工作。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3376 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3389 @@ -3152,7 +3344,9 @@ msgstr "无效的 LDAP 判别名：\"%s\"，无法提取相对判别名 (RDN) 值" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4033 -msgid "The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-letter code." +msgid "" +"The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country " +"2-letter code." msgstr "\"c\" 属性的值必须包含一个有效的 ISO-3166 国家/地区的 2 字母代码。" #. parameter check failed @@ -3194,7 +3388,8 @@ msgstr "CA 证书文件：\"%s\" 不存在。" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4887 -msgid "Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" +msgid "" +"Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" msgstr "尝试验证提供者服务器的服务器证书时出错。\n" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4888 @@ -3367,3 +3562,4 @@ #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:2046 msgid "Cannot write CA certificate file." msgstr "无法写入 CA 证书文件。" + Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/autoinst.zh_CN.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/autoinst.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 09:48:57 UTC (rev 90542) +++ trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/autoinst.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 10:00:27 UTC (rev 90543) @@ -13,9 +13,9 @@ "Project-Id-Version: autoinst\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 16:20+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-06-24 15:12+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 17:21+0800\n" "Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <marguerite@opensuse.org>\n" -"Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <opensuse-zh@opensuse.org>\n" +"Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_CN\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -126,7 +126,8 @@ #. if we get no argument or map of options we are not in command line #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:46 -msgid "Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" +msgid "" +"Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" msgstr "基于当前运行中系统创建 AutoYaST 方案的客户端" #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:56 @@ -139,10 +140,9 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Warning that an already existing autoyast configuration file will be overwritten. #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:94 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "%1 exists! Really overwrite?" msgid "File %s exists! Really overwrite?" -msgstr "%1 已存在！ 是否确实要覆盖？" +msgstr "文件 %s 已存在！真的要覆盖吗？" #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:98 msgid "Cloning the system..." @@ -157,15 +157,18 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:170 msgid "" "<p>Using this dialog, copy the contents of the file and specify the final\n" -"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified location.</p>" +"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified " +"location.</p>" msgstr "<p>使用此对话框复制文件内容并指定其在安装好的系统上的最终路径。YaST2 会把此文件复制到指定的位置。</p>" #. help 2/2 #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:177 msgid "" "<p>To protect copied files, set the owner and the permissions of the files.\n" -"Set the owner using the syntax <i>userid:groupid</i>. Permissions can be a symbolic\n" -"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit pattern for the\n" +"Set the owner using the syntax <i>userid:groupid</i>. Permissions can be a " +"symbolic\n" +"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit " +"pattern for the\n" "new permissions.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>为了保护所复制的文件，请设置文件的所有者和权限。\n" @@ -241,8 +244,10 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:321 msgid "" "<p>For many applications and services, you might have prepared\n" -"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location in the\n" -"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web server\n" +"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location " +"in the\n" +"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web " +"server\n" "and have an httpd.conf configuration file prepared.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>对于许多应用程序和服务，您可能早就优化出了一个配置文件，\n" @@ -536,10 +541,9 @@ msgstr "正在配置引导加载器..." #: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:69 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:63 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Repairing file system..." msgid "Registering the system..." -msgstr "正在修复文件系统..." +msgstr "正在注册系统..." #: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:70 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:64 msgid "Configuring Software selections..." @@ -658,7 +662,8 @@ #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:88 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> to add\n" +"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> " +"to add\n" "more <b>add-on</b> selections and packages.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -674,7 +679,8 @@ msgstr "安装来源位置 (如 http://myhost/13.1/DVD1/)" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:128 -msgid "The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" +msgid "" +"The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" msgstr "此系统的安装来源 (若您选了则不能创建映像，因为映像不是动态的)" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:164 @@ -690,9 +696,12 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Mount in /etc/fstab By:</b>\n" "\tNormally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" -"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system to mount\n" -"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems can be\n" -"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not possible.\n" +"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system " +"to mount\n" +"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems " +"can be\n" +"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not " +"possible.\n" "\t" msgstr "" "<p><b>挂载在 /etc/fstab 中的方式：</b>\n" @@ -706,7 +715,8 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:71 msgid "" "<p><b>Volume Label:</b>\n" -"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" +"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " +"makes sense only \n" "\t when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "\t A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" "\t " @@ -880,7 +890,8 @@ #. user selected this partition to be part of volgroup #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:589 -msgid "Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." +msgid "" +"Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." msgstr "大小 \"auto\" 仅在选中挂载点 \"/boot\" 或者 \"swap\" 时有效。" #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:597 @@ -1334,7 +1345,9 @@ #. @param list menu items #. @return [Symbol] #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:565 -msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current system?" +msgid "" +"Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current " +"system?" msgstr "您真的想要应用模块 '%1' 的设置到您当前系统吗？" #. opening/parsing the xml file failed @@ -1349,7 +1362,9 @@ #. FIXME: sucks sucks sucks sucks sucks #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:740 -msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current system?" +msgid "" +"Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current " +"system?" msgstr "您真的想要应用方案中的设置到您当前系统吗？" #. EXIT @@ -1487,7 +1502,8 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:348 msgid "" "Kickstart file was imported.\n" -"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and partitioning\n" +"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and " +"partitioning\n" "were imported correctly." msgstr "" "已导入 Kickstart 文件。\n" @@ -1619,7 +1635,8 @@ "The installation confirmation option is selected by default\n" "to avoid unwanted installation. It stops the system\n" "during installation and shows a summary of requested operations in the\n" -"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without interruption.\n" +"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without " +"interruption.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" "<P>\n" @@ -1631,7 +1648,8 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:155 msgid "" "<P>\n" -"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in manual mode\n" +"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in " +"manual mode\n" "after the first reboot (after package installation).\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1780,7 +1798,8 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:17 msgid "" -"<p>This tool uses <em>xmllint</em> to validate the profile against the DTD and\n" +"<p>This tool uses <em>xmllint</em> to validate the profile against the DTD " +"and\n" "it checks for missing data. Some missing data might be intentional and any\n" "reported errors can be ignored, for example, when creating classes.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1810,7 +1829,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>This tool creates a reference profile by reading\n" "information from this system. Select the resources to read from this system\n" -"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package selections.</p>\n" +"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package " +"selections.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>此工具通过从此系统读取信息创建一个参考方案。\n" "请在默认资源外选择一些要从此系统读取的资源，诸如分区和软件包选集。</p>\n" @@ -1821,7 +1841,8 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:37 msgid "" -"<p>The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target system.\n" +"<p>The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target " +"system.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>右侧的表显示了要在目标系统上创建的分区。\n" @@ -1862,7 +1883,8 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:53 msgid "" "If no partitions are defined and the specified drive is also\n" -"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions are\n" +"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions " +"are\n" "created automatically:" msgstr "若未定义分区且指定的驱动器还是根分区应驻留的驱动器，则系统会自动创建以下分区：" @@ -1879,8 +1901,15 @@ msgstr "<p><b>高级选项</b></p>" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:62 -msgid "By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition using sectors rather than size in MBytes." -msgstr "默认情况下，AutoYaST2 将创建一个扩展分区并将全部新分区作为逻辑设备进行添加。但是，可以指示 AutoYaST2 创建一个特定分区作为主分区或扩展分区。另外，也可以使用扇区而不是 MB 表示的大小来指定分区的大小。" +msgid "" +"By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new " +"partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST " +"to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended " +"partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition " +"using sectors rather than size in MBytes." +msgstr "" +"默认情况下，AutoYaST2 将创建一个扩展分区并将全部新分区作为逻辑设备进行添加。但是，可以指示 AutoYaST2 " +"创建一个特定分区作为主分区或扩展分区。另外，也可以使用扇区而不是 MB 表示的大小来指定分区的大小。" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:65 msgid "" @@ -1892,7 +1921,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "For LVM and RAID setup, consult the documentation and add the configuration\n" -"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID partitions as\n" +"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID " +"partitions as\n" "a preparation.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2014,7 +2044,8 @@ "<P>For your postinstallation script to run inside the chroot\n" "environment, choose the <i>chroot scripts</i> options. Those scripts are\n" "run before the system reboots for the first time. By default, the chroot \n" -"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the installed \n" +"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the installed " +"\n" "system, always use the mount point \"/mnt\" in your scripts.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2030,7 +2061,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>It is possible to run chroot scripts in a later stage after\n" -"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag \"chrooted\".\n" +"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag " +"\"chrooted\".\n" "This runs the scripts in the installed system. \n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2063,7 +2095,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Interpreter:</H3>\n" -"<P>Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use <i>Perl</i> or \n" +"<P>Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use <i>Perl</i> " +"or \n" "<i>Python</i> for preinstallation scripts.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2078,9 +2111,12 @@ "<H3>Network Access:</H3>\n" "<P>While executing postinstallation scripts, the network is disabled and\n" "requires initialization in the scripts to make the network accessible. An\n" -"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, which\n" -"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an installation\n" -"over a network, you can use the <b>Network</b> option for the postscript, too.\n" +"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, " +"which\n" +"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an " +"installation\n" +"over a network, you can use the <b>Network</b> option for the postscript, " +"too.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" "\n" @@ -2094,8 +2130,10 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Feedback and Debug:</H3>\n" -"<P>All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up box as feedback.\n" -"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that might help\n" +"<P>All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up box " +"as feedback.\n" +"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that " +"might help\n" "you to debug your script.</P>\n" msgstr "" "\n" @@ -2186,7 +2224,8 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:474 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the installation for\n" +"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the installation " +"for\n" "your needs and take control in different stages of the installation.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -2217,7 +2256,9 @@ #. @return [Boolean] true on success #. autoyast has read the autoyast configuration file but something went wrong #: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:914 src/modules/Profile.rb:725 -msgid "The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The error message is:\n" +msgid "" +"The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The " +"error message is:\n" msgstr "XML 解析器在解析 autoyast 方案时报告了一个错误。错误消息为：\n" #. backdoor for merging problems. @@ -2294,8 +2335,10 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:452 msgid "" -"<p>Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to those available\n" -"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the data\n" +"<p>Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to " +"those available\n" +"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the " +"data\n" "entered is collected and exported to the control file that can be used to\n" "install another system using AutoYaST.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -2308,7 +2351,8 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:459 msgid "" "<p>In addition to the existing and familiar modules,\n" -"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, including\n" +"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, " +"including\n" "partitioning, general options, and software.</p>\n" msgstr "<p>除已有模块和大家都熟悉的模块外，我们还为特殊和复杂的配置创建了新的接口，这些接口包括分区、常规选项和软件。</p>\n" @@ -2498,7 +2542,9 @@ #. Install #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:363 -msgid "Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" +msgid "" +"Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check " +"/tmp/ay_image.log" msgstr "映像创建失败于软件集安装环节。请检查 /tmp/ay_image.log" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:371 @@ -2506,7 +2552,9 @@ msgstr "正在创建映像 - 安装软件包" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:381 -msgid "Image creation failed while package installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" +msgid "" +"Image creation failed while package installation. Please check " +"/tmp/ay_image.log" msgstr "映像创建失败于软件包安装环节。请检查 /tmp/ay_image.log" #. Popup::Message( _("in the next file dialog you have to choose the target directory to save the image") ); @@ -2519,7 +2567,8 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:421 msgid "" "You can do changes to the image now in %1/\n" -"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be changed anymore." +"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be changed " +"anymore." msgstr "" "您现在可以在 %1/ 修改映像。\n" "您若按下确认按钮，%1/ 将被压缩成映像，便再也不能修改了。" @@ -2567,7 +2616,8 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:616 msgid "" -"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different AutoYaST XML file.\n" +"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different " +"AutoYaST XML file.\n" "If you press the ok-button, the iso will be created." msgstr "" "您现在可以在 %1 修改 ISO，比如添加一个完全不同的 AutoYaST XML 文件。\n" @@ -2612,12 +2662,16 @@ #. Solve dependencies #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:907 -msgid "The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the autoyast profile." +msgid "" +"The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the " +"autoyast profile." msgstr "软件包依赖关系解决器运行失败。请检查 autoyast 方案中的软件部分。" #. 1 cyl buffer per partition #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:494 -msgid "The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard disk. %1MB missing" +msgid "" +"The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard " +"disk. %1MB missing" msgstr "在您的 XML 方案中配置的分区计划并不适合该硬盘。缺少 %1MB" #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:922 Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/bootloader.zh_CN.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/bootloader.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 09:48:57 UTC (rev 90542) +++ trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/bootloader.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 10:00:27 UTC (rev 90543) @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ "Project-Id-Version: bootloader\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 16:20+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-08-01 02:20+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 17:34+0800\n" "Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <marguerite@opensuse.org>\n" "Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_CN\n" @@ -35,10 +35,9 @@ #. command line help text for delete action #: src/clients/bootloader.rb:58 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Set a global option" msgid "Delete a global option" -msgstr "设置全局选项" +msgstr "删除一个全局选项" #. command line help text for set action #: src/clients/bootloader.rb:65 @@ -72,10 +71,9 @@ #. command line, %1 is the value of bootloader option #: src/clients/bootloader.rb:182 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Value: %1" msgid "Value: %s" -msgstr "值：%1" +msgstr "值：%s" #. command line error report #: src/clients/bootloader.rb:185 @@ -110,12 +108,15 @@ #. warning text in the summary richtext #: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:115 -msgid "No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be bootable." +msgid "" +"No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be " +"bootable." msgstr "未选择安装任何引导加载器。您的系统可能无法引导。" #. error in the proposal #: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:125 -msgid "Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" +msgid "" +"Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" msgstr "出于分区原因，无法正确安装引导加载器" #. proposal part - bootloader label @@ -149,8 +150,10 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:24 msgid "" "<p><b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition</b><br>\n" -"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR code will then\n" -"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active even\n" +"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR " +"code will then\n" +"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active " +"even\n" "if the boot loader is installed in the MBR.</p>" msgstr "" "<b>在分区表中为引导分区设置活动旗标</b><br>\n" @@ -177,7 +180,8 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_helps.rb:23 msgid "" "<p><b>Timeout in Seconds</b><br>\n" -"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is loaded.</p>\n" +"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is " +"loaded.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>超时(以秒计)</b><br>\n" "指定在默认内核加载前引导加载器将等待的时间。</p>\n" @@ -198,40 +202,49 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:41 msgid "" -"<p><b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b> replace the master boot record of your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" +"<p><b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b> replace the master boot record of " +"your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" "boots the active partition).</p>" msgstr "<p><b>将通用引导代码写入主引导记录</b>将使用通用代码 (用于引导活动分区的独立于操作系统的代码) 替换您磁盘的主引导记录。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:44 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Boot Partition</b> is one of the recommended options, the other is\n" +"<p><b>Boot from Boot Partition</b> is one of the recommended options, the " +"other is\n" "<b>Boot from Root Partition</b>.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>从引导分区引导</b>是一个推荐选项，另一个是<b>从根分区引导</b>。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:47 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Master Boot Record</b> is not recommended if you have another operating system\n" +"<p><b>Boot from Master Boot Record</b> is not recommended if you have another " +"operating system\n" "installed on your computer</p>" msgstr "<p>若您计算机上还安装着另一个操作系统，则不推荐使用<b>从主引导记录引导</b>。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:50 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Root Partition</b> is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" -"partition. Either select <b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition</b> and <b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b>\n" -"in <b>Boot Loader Options</b> to update the master boot record if that is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" +"<p><b>Boot from Root Partition</b> is the recommended option whenever there " +"is a suitable\n" +"partition. Either select <b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot " +"Partition</b> and <b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b>\n" +"in <b>Boot Loader Options</b> to update the master boot record if that is " +"needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start this section.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>当有合适的分区时，<b>从根分区引导</b>是推荐选项。\n" -"若需要更新主引导记录，可选择在<b>引导加载器选项</b>中<b>在分区表中为引导分区设置活动旗标</b>并<b>写入通用引导代码到主引导记录</b>。或者也可以配置您其它的引导管理器去启动此引导项。</p>" +"若需要更新主引导记录，可选择在<b>引导加载器选项</b>中<b>在分区表中为引导分区设置活动旗标</b>并<b>写入通用引导代码到主引导记录</b>" +"。或者也可以配置您其它的引导管理器去启动此引导项。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:56 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Extended Partition</b> should be selected if your root partition is on \n" +"<p><b>Boot from Extended Partition</b> should be selected if your root " +"partition is on \n" "logical partition and the /boot partition is missing</p>" msgstr "若您的根分区位于逻辑分区上且没有 /boot 分区则应该选择<p><b>从扩展分区引导</b></p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:59 -msgid "<p><b>Custom Boot Partition</b> lets you choose a partition to boot from.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Custom Boot Partition</b> lets you choose a partition to boot from.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>自定义引导分区</b>可让您选择要从之引导的分区。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:62 @@ -241,23 +254,26 @@ msgstr "<p>多设备 (MD) 阵列由两个磁盘构建而成。激活<b>启用多设备阵列冗余</b>可将 GRUB 写入两个磁盘的主引导记录。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:65 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "" #| "<p><b>Use Serial Console</b> lets you define the parameters to use\n" #| "for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub</code>) for details.</p>" msgid "" "<p><b>Use Serial Console</b> lets you define the parameters to use\n" -"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub2</code>) for details.</p>" +"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub2<" +"/code>) for details.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>使用串行控制台</b>可让您定义用于串行控制台的参数。\n" -"细节请参考 grub 文档 (<code>info grub</code>)。</p>" +"细节请参考 grub 文档 (<code>info grub2</code>)。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:68 msgid "" "<p><b>Terminal Definition</b></p><br>\n" -"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (eg. a serial console),\n" -"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console</code> to the\n" -"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which you\n" +"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (eg. a " +"serial console),\n" +"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console<" +"/code> to the\n" +"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which " +"you\n" "press any key will be selected as a GRUB terminal.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>终端定义</b></p><br>\n" @@ -268,7 +284,8 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:75 msgid "" -"<p><b>Fallback Sections if default Fails</b> contains a list of section numbers\n" +"<p><b>Fallback Sections if default Fails</b> contains a list of section " +"numbers\n" "that will be used for booting in case the default section is unbootable.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>默认项失败时的备用引导项</b>包含了一个引导项编号列表，\n" @@ -281,7 +298,8 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:81 msgid "" "<p><b>Protect Boot Loader with Password</b><br>\n" -"Define the password that will be required to access the boot menu. YaST will only accept the password if you repeat\n" +"Define the password that will be required to access the boot menu. YaST will " +"only accept the password if you repeat\n" "it in <b>Retype Password</b>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>使用密码保护引导加载器</b><br>\n" @@ -470,27 +488,42 @@ #. #. $Id: helps.ycp 58279 2009-08-04 16:01:51Z juhliarik $ #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:23 -msgid "<p><b>Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define additional parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define additional " +"parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>可选内核命令行参数</b>可让您定义要传递给内核的额外参数。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:26 -msgid "<p><b>Vga Mode</b> defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the <i>console</i> to when booting.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Vga Mode</b> defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the <i>console<" +"/i> to when booting.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>VGA 模式</b>定义了引导时内核应设置的<i>控制台</i> VGA 模式。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:29 -msgid "<p><b>Failsafe Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define failsafe parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Failsafe Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define failsafe " +"parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>安全模式内核命令行参数</b>可让您定义要传递给内核的安全模式参数。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:32 -msgid "<p><b>Probe Foreign OS</b> by means of os-prober for multiboot with other foreign distribution </p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Probe Foreign OS</b> by means of os-prober for multiboot with other " +"foreign distribution </p>" msgstr "<p>可通过 os-prober <b>探测外来操作系统</b>以与其它外来操作系统多重引导</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:35 -msgid "<p><b>Protective MBR flag</b> is expert only settings, that is needed only on exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not touch if you are not sure.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>保护性 MBR 旗标</b>是一个专家设置，仅在一些诡异的硬件上需要。细节请参考 GPT 磁盘中的保护性 MBR。若您不确定则请不要碰它。</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Protective MBR flag</b> is expert only settings, that is needed only on " +"exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not touch if " +"you are not sure.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>保护性 MBR 旗标</b>是一个专家设置，仅在一些诡异的硬件上需要。细节请参考 GPT 磁盘中的保护性 MBR。若您不确定则请不要碰它。<" +"/p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:38 -msgid "<p><b>Distributor</b> specifies name of distributor of kernel used to create boot entry name. </p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Distributor</b> specifies name of distributor of kernel used to create " +"boot entry name. </p>" msgstr "<p><b>发行方</b>指定了用于创建引导项名称的内核发行方名称。</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:44 @@ -715,10 +748,12 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:52 msgid "" "<P>From <B>Other</B>,\n" -"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the current \n" +"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the current " +"\n" "configuration and propose a new configuration, start from scratch, or reread\n" "the configuration saved on your disk. %1</P>" -msgstr "<P>从<B>其它</B>中，您可以手动编辑引导加载器配置文件，清除当前配置并提出一个新方案，从零开始新配置，或重新读取保存在您磁盘上的配置。%1</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>从<B>其它</B>中，您可以手动编辑引导加载器配置文件，清除当前配置并提出一个新方案，从零开始新配置，或重新读取保存在您磁盘上的配置。%1</P>" #. help text 1/1 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:67 @@ -793,7 +828,8 @@ "- In the <b>Boot Sector</b> of the <tt>/boot</tt> or <tt>/</tt> (root) \n" "partition. This is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" "partition. Either set <b>Activate Boot Loader Partition</b> and\n" -"<b>Replace MBR with Generic Code</b> in <b>Boot Loader Installation Details</b>\n" +"<b>Replace MBR with Generic Code</b> in <b>Boot Loader Installation Details<" +"/b>\n" "to update the master boot record\n" "if it is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start &product;.</p>" @@ -936,7 +972,8 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:257 msgid "" "<p>Select <b>Menu Section</b> to add a section that \n" -"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the disk. This is used for\n" +"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the " +"disk. This is used for\n" "booting other operating systems.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>选择<b>菜单项</b>可添加一个从磁盘某分区加载配置文件 (引导项列表)的项。\n" @@ -1060,39 +1097,52 @@ #. error report #: src/include/bootloader/routines/wizards.rb:36 -msgid "Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." +msgid "" +"Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." msgstr "出于分区原因，无法正确安装引导加载器。" #. FATE#303643 Enable one-click changes in bootloader proposal #. #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:193 -msgid "Install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"disable_boot_mbr\">do not install</a>)" +msgid "" +"Install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"disable_boot_mbr\">do not install</a>)" msgstr "安装引导代码至 MBR(<a href=\"disable_boot_mbr\">不安装</a>)" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:197 -msgid "Do not install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"enable_boot_mbr\">install</a>)" +msgid "" +"Do not install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"enable_boot_mbr\">install</a>)" msgstr "不安装引导代码至 MBR(<a href=\"enable_boot_mbr\">安装</a>)" #. check for separated boot partition, use root otherwise #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:210 -msgid "Install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_boot\">do not install</a>)" +msgid "" +"Install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_boot\">do not " +"install</a>)" msgstr "安装引导代码至 /boot 分区(<a href=\"disable_boot_boot\">不安装</a>)" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:214 -msgid "Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_boot\">install</a>)" +msgid "" +"Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_boot\">" +"install</a>)" msgstr "不安装引导代码至 /boot 分区(<a href=\"enable_boot_boot\">安装</a>)" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:220 -msgid "Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_root\">do not install</a>)" +msgid "" +"Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_root\">do not " +"install</a>)" msgstr "安装引导代码至 \"/\" 分区(<a href=\"disable_boot_root\">不安装</a>)" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:224 -msgid "Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_root\">install</a>)" +msgid "" +"Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_root\">" +"install</a>)" msgstr "不安装引导代码至 \"/\" 分区(<a href=\"enable_boot_root\">安装</a>)" #. no location chosen, so warn user that it is problem unless he is sure #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:234 -msgid "Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected.Unless you know what you are doing please select above location." +msgid "" +"Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected.Unless you know what you " +"are doing please select above location." msgstr "警告：没有为引导加载器 stage1 选择位置。除非您知道您正在做什么否则请选择上面的位置。" #. TRANSLATORS: title for list of location proposals @@ -1139,8 +1189,13 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: description of technical problem. Do not translate technical terms unless native language have well known translation. #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:140 -msgid "Boot from MBR does not work together with btrfs filesystem and GPT disk label without bios_grub partition.To fix this issue, create bios_grub partition or use any ext filesystem for boot partition or do not install stage 1 to MBR." -msgstr "从 MBR 引导不能与 btrfs 文件系统和没有 bios_grub 分区的 GPT 磁盘标签一起使用。要修复此问题，可创建 bios_grub 分区或使用任意 ext 文件系统作为引导分区，或不要把 stage 1 安装到 MBR。" +msgid "" +"Boot from MBR does not work together with btrfs filesystem and GPT disk label " +"without bios_grub partition.To fix this issue, create bios_grub partition or " +"use any ext filesystem for boot partition or do not install stage 1 to MBR." +msgstr "" +"从 MBR 引导不能与 btrfs 文件系统和没有 bios_grub 分区的 GPT 磁盘标签一起使用。要修复此问题，可创建 bios_grub " +"分区或使用任意 ext 文件系统作为引导分区，或不要把 stage 1 安装到 MBR。" #. check if boot device is on raid0 #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:168 @@ -1149,7 +1204,9 @@ #. bnc#501043 added check for valid configuration #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:188 -msgid "The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. Master Boot Record" +msgid "" +"The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. " +"Master Boot Record" msgstr "引导设备在软件 RAID1 上。请选择其他的引导加载器位置，例如，主引导记录" #. if partitioning worked before upgrade, it will keep working (bnc#886604) Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/cluster.zh_CN.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/cluster.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 09:48:57 UTC (rev 90542) +++ trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/cluster.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 10:00:27 UTC (rev 90543) @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 16:20+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-07-08 13:15+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 17:58+0800\n" "Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <marguerite@opensuse.org>\n" "Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_CN\n" @@ -98,60 +98,56 @@ msgstr "冗余 IP 地址" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:115 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:499 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Node IP" msgid "Node ID" -msgstr "节点 IP" +msgstr "节点 ID" #. Set need to require 'set' #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:163 msgid "Node ID has to be fulfilled with a positive integer" -msgstr "" +msgstr "节点 ID 必须是一个正整数" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:170 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "The hardware address must be unique." msgid "Node ID must be unique" -msgstr "硬件地址必须是唯一的。" +msgstr "节点 ID 必须是唯一的" #. BNC#871970, change member address struct #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:191 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:245 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Bind Network Address:" msgid "The Bind Network Address has to be fulfilled" -msgstr "绑定网络地址：" +msgstr "必须填写绑定网络地址" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:197 msgid "The cluster name has to be fulfilled" -msgstr "" +msgstr "必须填写集群名称" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:214 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "The hardware address must be defined." msgid "The Member Address has to be fulfilled" -msgstr "硬件地址必须定义。" +msgstr "必须填写成员地址" #. BNC#880242, expected_votes must have value when "udp" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:220 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Play the test sound when the card is configured" msgid "The Expected Votes has to be fulfilled when udp is configured" -msgstr "配置声卡时播放测试声音" +msgstr "当配置了 udp 时必须填写期望票数" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:226 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:254 #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1463 msgid "The Multicast Address has to be fulfilled" -msgstr "" +msgstr "必须填写多播地址" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:236 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:264 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "The value for pos must be a positive integer." msgid "The Multicast port must be a positive integer" -msgstr "位置值必须为正整数。" +msgstr "多播端口必须为正整数" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:270 -msgid "Only passive or active can be chosen if multiple interface used. Set to passive." -msgstr "" +msgid "" +"Only passive or active can be chosen if multiple interface used. Set to " +"passive." +msgstr "若使用了多个接口则只能选择主动或被动。设置为被动。" #. BNC#871970, change member address struct to memberaddr #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:439 @@ -204,10 +200,9 @@ msgstr "IP" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:499 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Redundant IP Address" msgid "Redundant IP" -msgstr "冗余 IP 地址" +msgstr "冗余 IP" #. BNC#879596, check the corosync.conf format #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:539 @@ -215,15 +210,17 @@ " NOTICE: Detected old corosync configuration.\n" " Please reconfigure the member list and confirm all other settings." msgstr "" +" 注意：检测到了旧的 corosync 配置。\n" +" 请重新配置成员列表并确认全部其它设置。" #. Notice, current could be "nil" if the list is empty. #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:690 msgid "Number of threads must be integer" -msgstr "" +msgstr "线程数必须为整数" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:696 msgid "Number of threads must larger then 0" -msgstr "" +msgstr "线程数必须大于 0" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:734 msgid "Enable Security Auth" @@ -234,20 +231,24 @@ msgstr "线程：" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:740 -msgid "For a newly created cluster, push the button below to generate /etc/corosync/authkey." +msgid "" +"For a newly created cluster, push the button below to generate " +"/etc/corosync/authkey." msgstr "新创建的集群，请按下面按钮生成 /etc/corosync/authkey。" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:745 -msgid "To join an existing cluster, please copy /etc/corosync/authkey from other nodes manually." +msgid "" +"To join an existing cluster, please copy /etc/corosync/authkey from other " +"nodes manually." msgstr "要加入一个已有集群，请从其他节点手动复制 /etc/corosync/authkey。" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:773 msgid "Failed to create /etc/corosync/authkey" -msgstr "" +msgstr "创建 /etc/corosync/authkey 失败" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:775 msgid "Create /etc/corosync/authkey succeeded" -msgstr "" +msgstr "创建 /etc/corosync/authkey 成功" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:850 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:920 msgid "Running" @@ -263,16 +264,14 @@ msgstr "引导时" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:898 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "On -- Start pacemaker at booting" msgid "On -- Start pacemaker during boot" msgstr "开 -- 引导时启动 pacemaker" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:905 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Off -- Start pacemaker manually only" msgid "Off -- Start pacemaker manually" -msgstr "关 -- 仅手动启动 pacemaker" +msgstr "关 -- 手动启动 pacemaker" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:914 msgid "Switch On and Off" @@ -378,7 +377,8 @@ #. SaveCsync2(); #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1383 msgid "" -"Conntrackd is a daemon which helps to duplicate firewall status between cluster nodes.\n" +"Conntrackd is a daemon which helps to duplicate firewall status between " +"cluster nodes.\n" "YaST can help to configure some basic aspects of conntrackd.\n" "You need to start it with the ocf:heartbeat:conntrackd." msgstr "" @@ -403,10 +403,9 @@ msgstr "生成 /etc/conntrackd/conntrackd.conf" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1471 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "The value for pos must be a positive integer." msgid "The Group Number must be a positive integer" -msgstr "位置值必须为正整数。" +msgstr "组编号必须为正整数" #. All helps are here #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:35 @@ -421,23 +420,71 @@ #| "<p><b><big>Expected votes</big></b><br>Expect vote number for voting quorum. Will be automatically calculated when the nodelist {} section is present in corosync.conf or can be specified in the quorum {} section.<br></p>\n" #| "<p><b><big>Auto Generate Node ID</big></b><br>Nodeid is required when using IPv6. Auto node ID enabled will generate nodeid automatically.<br></p>\n" msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Bind Network Address</big></b><br>This specifies the address which the openais executive should bind. This address should always end in zero. If the totem traffic should be routed over 192.168.5.92, set bindnetaddr to 192.168.5.0.<br>This may also be an IPV6 address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. In this case, the full address must be specified and there is no automatic selection of the network interface within a specific subnet as with IPv4. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified.<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>This is the multicast address used by openais executive. The default should work for most networks, but the network administrator should be queried about a multicast address to use. Avoid 224.x.x.x because this is a \"config\" multicast address.<br>This may also be an IPV6 multicast address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified.</p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Port</big></b><br>This specifies the UDP port number. It is possible to use the same multicast address on a network with the openais services configured for different UDP ports.<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Member Address</big></b><br>This list specifies all the nodes in the cluster by IP address. This could be configurable when using udpu(Unicast). <br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Node ID</big></b><br>This configuration option is optional when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from the 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should not be used.<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>rrp_mode</big></b><br>This specifies the mode of redundant ring, which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen.<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Expected votes</big></b><br>Expect vote number for voting quorum. Will be automatically calculated when the nodelist {} section is present in corosync.conf or can be specified in the quorum {} section.<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Auto Generate Node ID</big></b><br>Nodeid is required when using IPv6. Auto node ID enabled will generate nodeid automatically.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Bind Network Address</big></b><br>This specifies the address " +"which the openais executive should bind. This address should always end in " +"zero. If the totem traffic should be routed over 192.168.5.92, set " +"bindnetaddr to 192.168.5.0.<br>This may also be an IPV6 address, in which " +"case IPV6 networking will be used. In this case, the full address must be " +"specified and there is no automatic selection of the network interface " +"within a specific subnet as with IPv4. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid " +"field must be specified.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>This is the multicast address used " +"by openais executive. The default should work for most networks, but the " +"network administrator should be queried about a multicast address to " +"use. Avoid 224.x.x.x because this is a \"config\" multicast address.<br>This " +" may also be an IPV6 multicast address, in which case IPV6 networking will " +"be used. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified.</p>" +"\n" +"<p><b><big>Port</big></b><br>This specifies the UDP port number. It is " +"possible to use the same multicast address on a network with the openais " +"services configured for different UDP ports.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Member Address</big></b><br>This list specifies all the nodes in " +"the cluster by IP address. This could be configurable when using " +"udpu(Unicast). <br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Node ID</big></b><br>This configuration option is optional " +"when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value " +"specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. " +"If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from the " +" 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring " +"identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should " +"not be used.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>rrp_mode</big></b><br>This specifies the mode of redundant ring, " +"which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers " +"slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network " +"environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly " +"double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become " +"cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network " +"interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one " +"interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple " +"interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen.<" +"br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Expected votes</big></b><br>Expect vote number for voting quorum. " +"Will be automatically calculated when the nodelist {} section is present in " +"corosync.conf or can be specified in the quorum {} section.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Auto Generate Node ID</big></b><br>Nodeid is required when using " +"IPv6. Auto node ID enabled will generate nodeid automatically.<br></p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b><big>绑定网络地址</big></b><br>这指定了 openais 执行文件应绑定的地址。该地址应总以 0 结尾。若 totem 流量应通过 192.168.5.92 中转，则设置 bindnetaddr 为 192.168.5.0。<br>这里也可以为 IPV6 地址，那样将会使用 IPV6 网络。这种情况下，必须指定完整地址且无法像 IPV4 那样在特定子网中自动选择网络接口。若使用了 IPV6 网络，则必须指定节点 ID 字段。<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>多播地址</big></b><br>这是 openais 执行文件使用的多播地址。默认值应可用于多数网络，但也应询问网络管理员要使用的多播地址。请避免 224.x.x.x 因为这是一个 \"配置的\" 多播地址。<br>这里也可以为 IPV6 多播地址，那样将会使用 IPV6 网络。若使用了 IPV6 网络，则必须指定节点 ID 字段。</p>\n" -"<p><b><big>端口</big></b><br>这指定了 UDP 端口号。可以在同一网络中为配置了不同的 UDP 端口的 openais 服务使用相同的多播地址。<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>成员地址</big></b><br>这个列表通过 IP 地址指定了集群中的全部节点。当使用 udpu 时这里是可以配置的。<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>节点 ID</big></b><br>该配置选项使用 IPv4 时为可选，IPv6 时为必选。这是一个 32 位值，指定了将传送给集群成员服务的节点标识符。若 IPv4 下该选项未指定，将使用该系统以环标识符 0 绑定到的 32 位 IP 地址。节点标识符值 0 是预留的，不应该使用。<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>rrp 模式</big></b><br>这指定了冗余环的模式，可以为无，主动或被动。主动复制在故障网络中从发送到送达的延迟相对较低，但性能较差。被动复制在 totem 协议未绑定 CPU 前可达到它的两倍速度。最后一个选项是无，仅使用一个网络接口来运行 TOTEM 协议。若只指定了一个接口指令，则将自动选无。若指定了多个接口指令，则只能选择主动或被动。<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>期望票数</big></b><br>参与表决的法定节点数的期望票数。当 corosync.conf 中存在 nodelist{} 部分时将自动计算，也可以在 quorum{} 部分指定。<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>自动生成节点 ID</big></b><br>当使用 IDv6 时需要节点 ID。启用自动生成节点 ID 将自动生成节点 ID。<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>绑定网络地址</big></b><br>这指定了 openais 执行文件应绑定的地址。该地址应总以 0 结尾。若 totem " +"流量应通过 192.168.5.92 中转，则设置 bindnetaddr 为 192.168.5.0。<br>这里也可以为 IPV6 地址，那样将会使用 " +"IPV6 网络。这种情况下，必须指定完整地址且无法像 IPV4 那样在特定子网中自动选择网络接口。若使用了 IPV6 网络，则必须指定节点 ID 字段。<" +"br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>多播地址</big></b><br>这是 openais 执行文件使用的多播地址。默认值应可用于多数网络，但也应询问网络管理员要使用的" +"多播地址。请避免 224.x.x.x 因为这是一个 \"配置的\" 多播地址。<br>这里也可以为 IPV6 多播地址，那样将会使用 IPV6 " +"网络。若使用了 IPV6 网络，则必须指定节点 ID 字段。</p>\n" +"<p><b><big>端口</big></b><br>这指定了 UDP 端口号。可以在同一网络中为配置了不同的 UDP 端口的 openais " +"服务使用相同的多播地址。<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>成员地址</big></b><br>这个列表通过 IP 地址指定了集群中的全部节点。当使用 udpu 时这里是可以配置的。<br><" +"/p>\n" +"<p><b><big>节点 ID</big></b><br>该配置选项使用 IPv4 时为可选，IPv6 时为必选。这是一个 32 " +"位值，指定了将传送给集群成员服务的节点标识符。若 IPv4 下该选项未指定，将使用该系统以环标识符 0 绑定到的 32 位 IP 地址。节点标识符值 0 " +"是预留的，不应该使用。<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>rrp 模式</big></b><br>这指定了冗余环的模式，可以为无，主动或被动。主动复制在故障网络中从发送到送达的延迟相对较低，但" +"性能较差。被动复制在 totem 协议未绑定 CPU 前可达到它的两倍速度。最后一个选项是无，仅使用一个网络接口来运行 TOTEM " +"协议。若只指定了一个接口指令，则将自动选无。若指定了多个接口指令，则只能选择主动或被动。<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>期望票数</big></b><br>参与表决的法定节点数的期望票数。当 corosync.conf 中存在 nodelist{} " +"部分时将自动计算，也可以在 quorum{} 部分指定。<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>自动生成节点 ID</big></b><br>当使用 IDv6 时需要节点 ID。启用自动生成节点 ID 将自动生成节点 ID。<" +"br></p>\n" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:45 #, fuzzy @@ -447,18 +494,46 @@ #| "<p><b><big>Enable Security Auth</big></b><br>This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 encryption algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this option adds a 36 byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces total throughput. Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles in aisexec as measured with gprof when enabled. For 100mbit networks with 1500 MTU frame transmissions: A throughput of 9mb/sec is possible with 100% cpu utilization when this option is enabled on 3ghz cpus. A throughput of 10mb/sec is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option is disabled on 3ghz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame transmissions: A throughput of 20mb/sec is possible when this option is enabled on 3ghz cpus. A throughput of 60mb/sec is possible when this option is disabled on 3ghz cpus. The defaul t is on. <br></p>\n" msgid "" "\n" -"<p><b><big>Threads</big></b><br>This directive controls how many threads are used to encrypt and send multicast messages. If secauth is off, the protocol will never use threaded sending. If secauth is on, this directive allows systems to be configured to use multiple threads to encrypt and send multicast messages. A thread directive of 0 indicates that no threaded send should be used. This mode offers best performance for non-SMP systems. The default is 0. <br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Enable Security Auth</big></b><br>This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 encryption algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this option adds a 36 byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces total throughput. Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles in aisexec as measured with gprof when enabled. For 100Mbit networks with 1500 MTU frame transmissions: A throughput of 9Mb/s is possible with 100% cpu utilization when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of 10Mb/s is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame transmissions: A throughput of 20Mb/s is possible when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of 60Mb/s is possible when this option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. The default is on. <b r></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Threads</big></b><br>This directive controls how many threads are " +"used to encrypt and send multicast messages. If secauth is off, the " +"protocol will never use threaded sending. If secauth is on, this " +"directive allows systems to be configured to use multiple threads to " +"encrypt and send multicast messages. A thread directive of 0 indicates " +"that no threaded send should be used. This mode offers best performance for " +"non-SMP systems. The default is 0. <br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Enable Security Auth</big></b><br>This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 " +"authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further " +"specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 encryption " +"algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this option adds a 36 " +"byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces total throughput. " +"Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles in aisexec as " +"measured with gprof when enabled. For 100Mbit networks with 1500 MTU " +"frame transmissions: A throughput of 9Mb/s is possible with 100% cpu " +"utilization when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of " +"10Mb/s is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option is disabled on " +"3GHz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame transmissions: A throughput " +"of 20Mb/s is possible when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A " +"throughput of 60Mb/s is possible when this option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. " +"The default is on. <br></p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"<p><b><big>线程</big></b><br>该指令控制用于加密和发送多播消息的线程数。若安全认证为关，则协议永不使用多线程发送。若安全认证为开，此指令允许系统配置使用多线程来加密和发送多播消息。线程指令为 0 表明不使用多线程发送。此模式为非 SMP 系统提供了最大性能。默认为 0。</br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>启用安全认证</big></b><br>这指定了是否应该使用 HMAC/SHA1 认证来认证全部消息。它进一步指定了是否应该使用 sober128 加密算法加密全部数据来保护数据不受窃听。启用此选项将添加一个 36 字节的头部到每条 TOTEM 发送的消息，这将降低总吞吐量。启用后，据 gprof 测量显示加密和认证消耗了 aisexec 中 75% 的 CPU 周期。对于 1500 MTU 帧传输的 100mbit 网络来说，在开启了此选项的 3ghz CPU 上，100% CPU 使用率可达到 9mb/秒的吞吐量; 在关闭了此选项的 3ghz CPU 上，20% 的 CPU 使用率可以达到 10mb/sec 的吞吐量。对于帧传输很大的 gig-e 网络来说：在启用了此选项的 3ghz CPU 上可以达到 20mb/秒的吞吐量; 在禁用了此选项的 3ghz CPU 上可以达到 60mb/秒的吞吐量。默认为开。<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>线程</big></b><br>该指令控制用于加密和发送多播消息的线程数。若安全认证为关，则协议永不使用多线程发送。若安全认证为开，此" +"指令允许系统配置使用多线程来加密和发送多播消息。线程指令为 0 表明不使用多线程发送。此模式为非 SMP 系统提供了最大性能。默认为 0。</br></p>" +"\n" +"<p><b><big>启用安全认证</big></b><br>这指定了是否应该使用 HMAC/SHA1 认证来认证全部消息。它进一步指定了是否应该使用 " +"sober128 加密算法加密全部数据来保护数据不受窃听。启用此选项将添加一个 36 字节的头部到每条 TOTEM " +"发送的消息，这将降低总吞吐量。启用后，据 gprof 测量显示加密和认证消耗了 aisexec 中 75% 的 CPU 周期。对于 1500 MTU " +"帧传输的 100mbit 网络来说，在开启了此选项的 3ghz CPU 上，100% CPU 使用率可达到 9mb/秒的吞吐量; 在关闭了此选项的 " +"3ghz CPU 上，20% 的 CPU 使用率可以达到 10mb/sec 的吞吐量。对于帧传输很大的 gig-e 网络来说：在启用了此选项的 3ghz " +"CPU 上可以达到 20mb/秒的吞吐量; 在禁用了此选项的 3ghz CPU 上可以达到 60mb/秒的吞吐量。默认为开。<br></p>\n" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:50 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Booting</big></b><br>Starting corosync service during boot or not</p>\n" -"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Firewall Settings</big></b><br>Enable the port when Firewall is enabled</p>\n" +"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Booting</big></b><br>Starting corosync service during boot " +"or not</p>\n" +"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Firewall Settings</big></b><br>Enable the port when Firewall " +"is enabled</p>\n" "\t\t\t" msgstr "" "\n" @@ -469,28 +544,42 @@ #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:56 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync Host</big></b><br>The hostnames used here must be the local hostnames of the cluster nodes. That means you must use exactly the same string as printed out by the hostname command.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync File</big></b><br>The full absolute filename to be synced.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Pre-Shared-Keys</big></b><br>Authentication is performed using the IP addresses and pre-shared-keys in Csync2. The key file is generated with csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. The file key_hagroup should be copied to all members of the cluster manually after it's created.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync Host</big></b><br>The hostnames used here must be the " +"local hostnames of the cluster nodes. That means you must use exactly the " +"same string as printed out by the hostname command.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync File</big></b><br>The full absolute filename to be " +"synced.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Pre-Shared-Keys</big></b><br>Authentication is performed using " +"the IP addresses and pre-shared-keys in Csync2. The key file is generated " +"with csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. The file key_hagroup should be copied " +"to all members of the cluster manually after it's created.</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>同步主机</big></b><br>这里使用的主机名必须是集群节点的本地主机名。这意味着您必须输入与 hostname 命令的打印输出完全相同的内容。</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>同步主机</big></b><br>这里使用的主机名必须是集群节点的本地主机名。这意味着您必须输入与 hostname " +"命令的打印输出完全相同的内容。</p>\n" "\t\t<p><b><big>同步文件</big></b><br>要同步的完整绝对文件名。</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>预共享密钥</big></b><br>在 Csync2 中使用 IP 地址和预共享密钥进行认证。可使用 csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup 生成密钥文件。创建之后应将 key_hagroup 文件手动复制到所有集群成员中去。</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>预共享密钥</big></b><br>在 Csync2 中使用 IP 地址和预共享密钥进行认证。可使用 csync2 -k " +"/etc/csync2/key_hagroup 生成密钥文件。创建之后应将 key_hagroup 文件手动复制到所有集群成员中去。</p>\n" "\t" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:63 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Dedicated Interface</big></b><br>A dedicated network interface for syncing. The interface must support multicast, and is UP for using. You may have to have it pre-configured. </p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>IP</big></b><br>The IPv4 address assigned to the dedicated network interface. This is detected automatically.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>The multicast address to be used for syncing.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Group Number</big></b><br>A numeric ID indicate the group for syncing.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Dedicated Interface</big></b><br>A dedicated network interface " +"for syncing. The interface must support multicast, and is UP for using. You " +"may have to have it pre-configured. </p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>IP</big></b><br>The IPv4 address assigned to the dedicated " +"network interface. This is detected automatically.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>The multicast address to be " +"used for syncing.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Group Number</big></b><br>A numeric ID indicate the group for " +"syncing.</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>专用接口</big></b><br>一个用于同步的专用网络接口。接口必须支持多播，并且是在线可使用的。您或许需要预先配置它。</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>专用接口</big></b><br>一个用于同步的专用网络接口。接口必须支持多播，并且是在线可使用的。您或许需要预先配置它。<" +"/p>\n" "\t\t<p><b><big>IP</big></b><br>指派给专用网络接口的 IPv4 地址。这是自动检测的。</p>\n" "\t\t<p><b><big>多播地址</big></b><br>用于同步的多播地址。</p>\n" "\t\t<p><b><big>组编号</big></b><br>同步时表示组的一个数字 ID。</p>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/control.zh_CN.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/control.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 09:48:57 UTC (rev 90542) +++ trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/control.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 10:00:27 UTC (rev 90543) @@ -14,9 +14,9 @@ "Project-Id-Version: control\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 16:21+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-06-08 16:22+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 17:30+0800\n" "Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <marguerite@opensuse.org>\n" -"Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <opensuse-zh@opensuse.org>\n" +"Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_CN\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -25,7 +25,6 @@ "X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" #: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:3 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "" #| "\n" #| "<p><b>Congratulations!</b></p>\n" @@ -49,7 +48,7 @@ "点击<b>完成</b>后，您就可以登入系统了。</p>\n" "<p>欢迎访问我们的站点：%1。</p>\n" "<p>祝您使用愉快！<br>您的 openSUSE 开发团队</p>\n" -"\t " +" " #: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:10 msgid "" @@ -136,7 +135,6 @@ #: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:36 #: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:63 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Load Linuxrc Network Configuration" msgid "Load linuxrc Network Configuration" msgstr "加载 Linuxrc 网络配置" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/crowbar.zh_CN.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/crowbar.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 09:48:57 UTC (rev 90542) +++ trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/crowbar.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 10:00:27 UTC (rev 90543) @@ -4,15 +4,15 @@ # Copyright (C) 2001 SuSE GmbH. # # Marguerite Su, 2012. -# 玛格丽特 · 苏 <i@marguerite.su>, 2013. +# 玛格丽特 · 苏 <i@marguerite.su>, 2013, 2014. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 16:20+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-02-02 02:23+0800\n" -"Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <i@marguerite.su>\n" -"Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <opensuse-zh@opensuse.org>\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 17:12+0800\n" +"Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <marguerite@opensuse.org>\n" +"Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_CN\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -27,20 +27,18 @@ #. table header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:96 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "&Repository Name" msgid "Repository Name" -msgstr "安装源名称(&R)" +msgstr "软件源名称" #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:96 msgid "URL" msgstr "URL" #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:96 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "User Found Error" msgid "Ask On Error" -msgstr "用户发现错误" +msgstr "出错时询问" #. help text #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:106 @@ -50,66 +48,78 @@ "Some examples of how the URL could look like:\n" "</p><p>\n" "<ul>\n" -"<li><i>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/</i> for SMT server\n" -"<li><i>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3.0-pool-x86_64/sles11-sp3-x86_64/</i> for SUSE Manager Server.\n" +"<li><i>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/</i> " +"for SMT server\n" +"<li><i>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3.0-pool-x86_64/sle" +"s11-sp3-x86_64/</i> for SUSE Manager Server.\n" "</p><p>\n" "For detailed description, check the Deployment Guide.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" +"<p>在这里您可以编辑您<b>更新软件源</b>的位置。</p>\n" +"<p>\n" +"URL 示例：\n" +"</p><p>\n" +"<ul>\n" +"<li>SMT 服务器：<i>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/" +"</i>\n" +"<li>SUSE Manager 服务器：<i>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3." +"0-pool-x86_64/sles11-sp3-x86_64/</i>\n" +"</p><p>\n" +"详细描述请查阅部署指南。\n" +"</p>" #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:122 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Repository URL" msgid "Repository &URL" -msgstr "安装源 URL" +msgstr "软件源 &URL" #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:135 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "User Found Error" msgid "&Ask On Error" -msgstr "用户发现错误" +msgstr "出错时询问(&A)" #. table header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:155 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Administrator DN" msgid "Administrator Name" -msgstr "管理员 DN" +msgstr "管理员名称" #. help text #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:165 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "<p>Enter the password for Crowbar administrator.</p>" msgid "<p>Manage user names and passwords for Crowbar administrators.</p>" -msgstr "<p>请输入 Crowbar 系统管理员密码。</p>" +msgstr "<p>管理 Crowbar 管理员的用户名和密码。</p>" #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:201 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "&Model" msgid "&Mode" -msgstr "型号(&M)" +msgstr "模式(&M)" #. help text for the Network mode tab (do not translate bastion) #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:203 msgid "" -"<p>Here, define a <b>Network Mode</b> with relevant <b>Bonding Policy</b>.</p>\n" -"<p>You can also specify interface names for the bastion network conduits as space-separated list.</p>" +"<p>Here, define a <b>Network Mode</b> with relevant <b>Bonding Policy</b>.</p>" +"\n" +"<p>You can also specify interface names for the bastion network conduits as " +"space-separated list.</p>" msgstr "" +"<p>在这里定义一个<b>网络模式</>及相关的<b>绑定策略</b>。</p>\n" +"<p>您也可以空格分隔列表指定堡垒网络管道的接口名称。</p>" #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:213 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Bonding Policy" msgid "Bonding &Policy" -msgstr "绑定策略" +msgstr "绑定策略(&P)" #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:222 msgid "P&hysical interfaces mapping for bastion network" -msgstr "" +msgstr "堡垒网络物理接口绑定(&h)" #. help text for conduit if list #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:231 @@ -118,6 +128,9 @@ "<tt>[Quantifier][Speed][Order]</tt>.\n" "Valid examples are <tt>+1g2</tt>, <tt>10g1</tt> or <tt>?1g2</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" +"<p>每个物理接口定义均需匹配模式\n" +"<tt>[数量][速度][顺序]</tt>。\n" +"有效示例如 <tt>+1g2</tt>, <tt>10g1</tt> 或 <tt>?1g2</tt>。</p>" #. table header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:265 @@ -138,29 +151,26 @@ #. checkbox label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:286 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Use VLAN" msgid "Use &VLAN" -msgstr "使用虚拟局域网" +msgstr "使用虚拟局域网(&V)" #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:296 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "VLAN ID" msgid "VLAN &ID" -msgstr "虚拟局域网 ID" +msgstr "虚拟局域网 &ID" #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:306 msgid "Rou&ter" -msgstr "" +msgstr "路由(&t)" #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:328 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Restoring user preferences..." msgid "Router pre&ference" -msgstr "正在恢复用户首选项..." +msgstr "路由偏好(&f)" #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:338 @@ -173,31 +183,27 @@ msgstr "网络掩码(&M)" #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:383 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Broadcast" msgid "Broa&dcast" -msgstr "广播" +msgstr "广播(&d)" #. checkbox label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:393 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Add Bridge" msgid "&Add Bridge" -msgstr "添加网桥" +msgstr "添加网桥(&A)" #. push button label& #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:402 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "&Edit Ranges..." msgid "Edit Ran&ges..." -msgstr "编辑地址段(&E)..." +msgstr "编辑地址段(&g)..." #. checkbox label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:413 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Bond Network" msgid "Add &Bastion Network" -msgstr "绑定网络" +msgstr "添加堡垒网络(&B)" #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:425 @@ -230,7 +236,6 @@ #. error popup #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:636 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "" #| "Configuration name %1 already exists.\n" #| "Choose a different one." @@ -238,15 +243,14 @@ "User '%1' already exists.\n" "Choose a different name." msgstr "" -"配置名称 %1 已存在。\n" +"用户 '%1' 已存在。\n" "请选择一个不同的名称。" #. error popup #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:781 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "The entered URL '%1' is invalid" msgid "The interface format '%1' is not valid" -msgstr "输入的 URL '%1' 无效。" +msgstr "接口格式 '%1' 无效。" #. table entry (VLAN status) #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:861 @@ -288,10 +292,9 @@ #. error popup #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1047 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "The address '%1' is not part of network '%2'." msgid "The IP address '%1' is not part of network '%2'." -msgstr "地址 '%1' 不是网络 '%2' 的一部分。" +msgstr "IP 地址 '%1' 不是网络 '%2' 的一部分。" #. popup message #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1068 @@ -328,47 +331,43 @@ #. tab header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1373 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "User Settings" msgid "&User Settings" -msgstr "用户设置" +msgstr "用户设置(&U)" #. label (hint for user) #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1385 -msgid "If no user is present, user 'crowbar' with default password will be used." -msgstr "" +msgid "" +"If no user is present, user 'crowbar' with default password will be used." +msgstr "若没有用户则将使用 'crowbar' 用户和默认密码。" #. tab header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1403 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Network Mode" msgid "N&etwork Mode" -msgstr "网络模式" +msgstr "网络模式(&e)" #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1411 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Bond Network" msgid "Bastion Network" -msgstr "绑定网络" +msgstr "堡垒网络" #. tab header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1454 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Networks" msgid "Net&works" -msgstr "网络" +msgstr "网络(&w)" #. tab header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1490 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Repositories" msgid "Re&positories" -msgstr "安装源" +msgstr "软件源(&p)" #. label (hint for user) #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1501 msgid "Empty URL means that default value will be used." -msgstr "" +msgstr "空白 URL 意味着将使用默认值。" #. popup message %1 is FQDN #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1653 Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/drbd.zh_CN.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/drbd.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 09:48:57 UTC (rev 90542) +++ trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/drbd.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 10:00:27 UTC (rev 90543) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 16:20+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-07-08 13:23+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 17:29+0800\n" "Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <marguerite@opensuse.org>\n" "Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_CN\n" @@ -231,14 +231,14 @@ #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:69 msgid "" -"<p>Clicking \"Add\", \"Edit\", \"Delete\" button to add, edit or delete a resource</p>\n" +"<p>Clicking \"Add\", \"Edit\", \"Delete\" button to add, edit or delete a " +"resource</p>\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" "<p>点击 \"添加\"、\"编辑\"、\"删除\" 按钮来添加、编辑或删除一个资源</p>\n" "\t\t" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:75 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "" #| "\n" #| "\t\t<p>\"Name\" is mandatory and must match the Linux host name (uname -n) of one of the nodes</p>\n" @@ -250,20 +250,36 @@ #| "\t\t" msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Name\" is mandatory and must match the Linux host name (uname -n) of one of the nodes. Should not include \".\" in hostname.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Address:Port\": A resource needs one IP address per device, which is used to wait for incoming connections from the partner device to reach the device. Each DRBD resource needs a TCP port which is used to connect to the node's partner device.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Device\": The name of the block device node of the resource being described. You must use this device with your application (file system) and you must not use the low level block device which is specified with the disk parameter,following its minor number. Or either omit the name or minor and the minor number. If you omit the name a default of /dev/drbdminor will be used.\n" -"\t\tLike: '/dev/drbd{service} minor {minor drbd number [0...255]}' or '/dev/drbd{minor drbd number [0...255]}'</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Disk\": DRBD uses this block device to actually store and retrieve the data. Never access such a device while DRBD is running on top of it.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Meta-disk\": internal. Internal means that the last part of the backing device is used to store the meta-data.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Name\" is mandatory and must match the Linux host name (uname -n) of " +"one of the nodes. Should not include \".\" in hostname.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Address:Port\": A resource needs one IP address per device, which is " +"used to wait for incoming connections from the partner device to reach the " +"device. Each DRBD resource needs a TCP port which is used to connect to the " +"node's partner device.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Device\": The name of the block device node of the resource being " +"described. You must use this device with your application (file system) and " +"you must not use the low level block device which is specified with the disk " +"parameter,following its minor number. Or either omit the name or minor and " +"the minor number. If you omit the name a default of /dev/drbdminor will be " +"used.\n" +"\t\tLike: '/dev/drbd{service} minor {minor drbd number [0...255]}' or " +"'/dev/drbd{minor drbd number [0...255]}'</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Disk\": DRBD uses this block device to actually store and retrieve " +"the data. Never access such a device while DRBD is running on top of it.</p>" +"\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Meta-disk\": internal. Internal means that the last part of the " +"backing device is used to store the meta-data.</p>\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" "\n" -"\t\t<p>\"名称\" 是必需的并且必须匹配其中某个节点的 Linux 主机名 (uname -n)</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"地址:端口\"：一个资源针对每个设备都需要一个 IP 地址，用于等待来自父设备的进站连接以访问设备。每个分布式复制块设备资源都需要一个 TCP 端口，用于连接到节点的父设备。</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"设备\"：所描述的资源的块设备节点的名称。在您的应用程序 (文件系统) 中您必须使用此设备，伴随其 minor 编号，而不能使用由磁盘参数指定的底层块设备。</p>\n" -"\t\t如：'/dev/drbd_r0 minor 0'</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"磁盘\"：事实上分布式复制块设备使用此设备来存储和撷取数据。当其上正在运行分布式复制块设备时请永远不要访问它。</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"名称\" 是必需的并且必须匹配其中某个节点的 Linux 主机名 (uname -n)。主机名中不应包含 \".\"。</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"地址:端口\"：一个资源针对每个设备都需要一个 IP 地址，用于等待来自父设备的进站连接以访问设备。每个分布式复制块设备资源都需要一个 " +"TCP 端口，用于连接到节点的父设备。</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"设备\"：所描述的资源的块设备节点的名称。在您的应用程序 (文件系统) 中您必须使用此设备，而不能使用由磁盘参数及其 minor " +"编号指定的底层块设备。或者要么省略名称，要么省略 minor 及 minor 编号。若您省略了名称则将使用默认的 /dev/drbdminor。</p>\n" +"\t\t如： '/dev/drbd{service} minor {minor drbd number [0...255]}' 或 " +"'/dev/drbd{minor drbd number [0...255]}'</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"磁盘\"：分布式复制块设备使用此块设备来真正存储和撷取数据。当其上正在运行分布式复制块设备时请永远不要访问这样的设备。</p>\n" "\t\t<p>\"元磁盘\"：内部使用。内部使用意味着备份设备的最后一部分用于存储元数据。</p>\n" "\t\t" @@ -271,48 +287,92 @@ msgid "" "\n" "\t\t<p><b>Protocol</b></p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol A: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and local TCP send buffer.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol B: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and remote buffer cache.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol C: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached both local and remote disk.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol A: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local " +"disk and local TCP send buffer.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol B: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local " +"disk and remote buffer cache.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol C: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached both " +"local and remote disk.</p>\n" "\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t \n" "\t\t<p><b>wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>degr-wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout, if this node was a degraded cluster</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>degr-wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout, if this node was " +"a degraded cluster</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>on-io-error</b>: What to do when the lower level device reports io-error to the upper layers</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>on-io-error</b>: What to do when the lower level device reports " +"io-error to the upper layers</p>\n" "\t\t<p><b>sndbuf-size</b>: The size of the TCP socket send buffer</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>max-buffers</b>: Maximum number of requests to be allocated by DRBD</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>max-buffers</b>: Maximum number of requests to be allocated by " +"DRBD</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>timeout</b>: If the partner node fails to send an expected response packet within time 10ths of a second, the partner node is considered dead and therefore the TCP/IP connection is abandoned. This must be lower than connect-int and ping-int. The default value is 60 = 6 seconds, the unit 0.1 seconds.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>connect-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet. In case the peer's reply is not received within this time period, it is considered as dead. The default value is 500ms, the default unit is 100ms</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>ping-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>timeout</b>: If the partner node fails to send an expected response " +"packet within time 10ths of a second, the partner node is considered dead and " +"therefore the TCP/IP connection is abandoned. This must be lower than " +"connect-int and ping-int. The default value is 60 = 6 seconds, the unit 0.1 " +"seconds.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>connect-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a " +"keep-alive packet. In case the peer's reply is not received within this time " +"period, it is considered as dead. The default value is 500ms, the default " +"unit is 100ms</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>ping-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive " +"packet</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>max-epoch-size</b>: The highest number of data blocks between two write barriers</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>ko-count</b>: the secondary node fails to complete a single write request for count times the timeout, it is expelled from the cluster. The default value is 0, which disables this feature.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>rate</b>: To ensure a smooth operation of the application on top of DRBD, it is possible to limit the bandwidth which may be used by background synchronizations. The default is 250 KB/sec, the default unit is KB/sec.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>al-extents</b>: parameter you control how big the hot area (= active set) can get. The default number of extents is 127. (Minimum: 7, Maximum: 3843)</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>max-epoch-size</b>: The highest number of data blocks between two " +"write barriers</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>ko-count</b>: the secondary node fails to complete a single write " +"request for count times the timeout, it is expelled from the cluster. The " +"default value is 0, which disables this feature.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>rate</b>: To ensure a smooth operation of the application on top " +"of DRBD, it is possible to limit the bandwidth which may be used by " +"background synchronizations. The default is 250 KB/sec, the default unit is " +"KB/sec.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>al-extents</b>: parameter you control how big the hot area (= " +"active set) can get. The default number of extents is 127. (Minimum: 7, " +"Maximum: 3843)</p>\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" "\n" "\t\t<p><b>协议</b></p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol A: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and local TCP send buffer.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol B: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and remote buffer cache.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol C: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached both local and remote disk.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol A: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local " +"disk and local TCP send buffer.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol B: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local " +"disk and remote buffer cache.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol C: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached both " +"local and remote disk.</p>\n" "\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t \n" "\t\t<p><b>wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>degr-wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout, if this node was a degraded cluster</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>degr-wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout, if this node was " +"a degraded cluster</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>on-io-error</b>: What to do when the lower level device reports io-error to the upper layers</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>on-io-error</b>: What to do when the lower level device reports " +"io-error to the upper layers</p>\n" "\t\t<p><b>sndbuf-size</b>: The size of the TCP socket send buffer</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>max-buffers</b>: Maximum number of requests to be allocated by DRBD</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>max-buffers</b>: Maximum number of requests to be allocated by " +"DRBD</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>timeout</b>: If the partner node fails to send an expected response packet within time 10ths of a second, the partner node is considered dead and therefore the TCP/IP connection is abandoned. This must be lower than connect-int and ping-int. The default value is 60 = 6 seconds, the unit 0.1 seconds.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>connect-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet. In case the peer's reply is not received within this time period, it is considered as dead. The default value is 500ms, the default unit is 100ms</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>ping-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>timeout</b>: If the partner node fails to send an expected response " +"packet within time 10ths of a second, the partner node is considered dead and " +"therefore the TCP/IP connection is abandoned. This must be lower than " +"connect-int and ping-int. The default value is 60 = 6 seconds, the unit 0.1 " +"seconds.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>connect-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a " +"keep-alive packet. In case the peer's reply is not received within this time " +"period, it is considered as dead. The default value is 500ms, the default " +"unit is 100ms</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>ping-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive " +"packet</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>max-epoch-size</b>: The highest number of data blocks between two write barriers</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>ko-count</b>: the secondary node fails to complete a single write request for count times the timeout, it is expelled from the cluster. The default value is 0, which disables this feature.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>rate</b>: To ensure a smooth operation of the application on top of DRBD, it is possible to limit the bandwidth which may be used by background synchronizations. The default is 250 KB/sec, the default unit is KB/sec.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>al-extents</b>: parameter you control how big the hot area (= active set) can get. The default number of extents is 127. (Minimum: 7, Maximum: 3843)</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>max-epoch-size</b>: The highest number of data blocks between two " +"write barriers</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>ko-count</b>: the secondary node fails to complete a single write " +"request for count times the timeout, it is expelled from the cluster. The " +"default value is 0, which disables this feature.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>rate</b>: To ensure a smooth operation of the application on top " +"of DRBD, it is possible to limit the bandwidth which may be used by " +"background synchronizations. The default is 250 KB/sec, the default unit is " +"KB/sec.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>al-extents</b>: parameter you control how big the hot area (= " +"active set) can get. The default number of extents is 127. (Minimum: 7, " +"Maximum: 3843)</p>\n" "\t\t" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:112 @@ -320,16 +380,20 @@ msgstr "<p><b><big>分布式复制块设备 (DRBD) 全局配置</big></b></p>" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:115 -msgid "<p>Check <b>\"Disable IP Verification\"</b> to disable one of drbdadm's sanity check</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Check <b>\"Disable IP Verification\"</b> to disable one of drbdadm's " +"sanity check</p>" msgstr "<p>勾选<b>\"禁用 IP 验证\"</b>来禁用 drbdadm 的一个合理性检查</p>" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:118 msgid "" -"<p><b>Dialog Refresh:</b> The user dialog counts and displays the seconds it waited so\n" +"<p><b>Dialog Refresh:</b> The user dialog counts and displays the seconds it " +"waited so\n" " far. You might want to disable this if you have the console\n" " of your server connected to a serial terminal server with\n" " limited logging capacity.\n" -" The Dialog will print the count each 'dialog-refresh' seconds,\n" +" The Dialog will print the count each 'dialog-refresh' " +"seconds,\n" " set it to 0 to disable redrawing completely. </p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>对话框刷新：</b> 用户对话框计数并显示当前等待的秒数。\n" @@ -461,7 +525,7 @@ #: src/include/drbd/resource_conf.rb:552 msgid "Node names must not include \".\" , using the local hostname." -msgstr "" +msgstr "节点名称必须不包含 \".\"，使用本机主机名。" #: src/include/drbd/resource_conf.rb:582 msgid "Please fill out all fields." Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/geo-cluster.zh_CN.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/geo-cluster.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 09:48:57 UTC (rev 90542) +++ trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/geo-cluster.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 10:00:27 UTC (rev 90543) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ "Project-Id-Version: \n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 16:20+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-07-05 15:41+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 17:36+0800\n" "Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <marguerite@opensuse.org>\n" "Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_CN\n" @@ -65,17 +65,15 @@ #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:689 #: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:46 #: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:140 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "GeoCluster Configuration" msgid "Geo Cluster Configuration" -msgstr "GeoCluster 配置" +msgstr "地理集群配置" #. GeoCluster overview dialog caption #: src/include/geo-cluster/complex.rb:143 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "GeoCluster Overview" msgid "Geo Cluster Overview" -msgstr "GeoCluster 概览" +msgstr "地理集群概览" #. encoding: utf-8 #. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ @@ -115,10 +113,9 @@ msgstr "端口" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:71 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "arbitrator ip" msgid "arbitrator" -msgstr "仲裁主机 IP" +msgstr "仲裁主机" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:74 src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:85 #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:679 @@ -158,10 +155,9 @@ msgstr "取消" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:143 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Please enter valid ip address" msgid "Please enter a valid ip address" -msgstr "请输入有效的 IP 地址" +msgstr "请输入一个有效的 IP 地址" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:184 msgid "Enter ticket and timeout" @@ -192,25 +188,21 @@ msgstr "before-acquire-handler" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:237 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "timeout is no valid" msgid "timeout is invalid" msgstr "超时无效" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:239 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "expire is no valid" msgid "expire is invalid" msgstr "过期时间无效" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:241 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "acquireafter is no valid" msgid "acquireafter is invalid" msgstr "acquireafter 无效" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:243 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "retries is no valid" msgid "retries is invalid" msgstr "重试次数无效" @@ -220,16 +212,14 @@ msgstr "小于 3 的重试次数值是非法的" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:247 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "weights is no valid" msgid "weights is invalid" msgstr "权重无效" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:249 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "ticket can not be null" msgid "ticket can not be empty" -msgstr "票据不能为 null" +msgstr "票据不能为空" #. fill confs with global_files #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:358 @@ -240,16 +230,14 @@ #. Wizard::SetContentsButtons(caption, contents, HELPS["c2"]:"", #. Label::BackButton(), Label::NextButton()); #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:494 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Enter an IP address of your site" msgid "Enter an IP address of your arbitrator" -msgstr "请输入您站点的 IP 地址" +msgstr "请输入一个您的仲裁主机的 IP 地址" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:505 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Edit IP address of your site" msgid "Edit IP address of your arbitrator" -msgstr "编辑您站点的 IP 地址" +msgstr "编辑您仲裁主机的 IP 地址" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:521 msgid "Enter an IP address of your site" @@ -265,7 +253,6 @@ #. abort? #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:600 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Configuration name cannot be empty." msgid "Configuration name can not be empty." msgstr "配置名称不能为空。" @@ -283,10 +270,9 @@ msgstr "必须填写「传输」！" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:621 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "transport have to be filled!" msgid "arbitrator have to be filled!" -msgstr "必须填写「传输」！" +msgstr "必须填写仲裁主机！" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:626 msgid "site have to be filled!" @@ -330,10 +316,9 @@ #. GeoCluster read dialog caption #: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:273 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Initializing geo-cluster Configuration" msgid "Initializing Geo Cluster Configuration" -msgstr "正在初始化 geo-cluster 配置" +msgstr "正在初始化地理集群配置" #: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:286 src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:289 msgid "Read SuSEFirewall Settings" @@ -362,10 +347,9 @@ #. GeoCluster write dialog caption #: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:332 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Saving geo-cluster Configuration" msgid "Saving Geo Cluster Configuration" -msgstr "正在保存 geo-cluster 配置" +msgstr "正在保存地理集群配置" #. Progress stage 1/2 #: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:348 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:223 Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/iscsi-lio-server.zh_CN.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/iscsi-lio-server.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 09:48:57 UTC (rev 90542) +++ trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/iscsi-lio-server.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 10:00:27 UTC (rev 90543) @@ -9,9 +9,9 @@ "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 16:20+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-06-11 12:55+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 17:18+0800\n" "Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <marguerite@opensuse.org>\n" -"Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <opensuse-zh@opensuse.org>\n" +"Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_CN\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -78,10 +78,9 @@ msgstr "端口号" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:143 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Invalid IP address." msgid "Bind all IP addresses" -msgstr "无效的 IP 地址。" +msgstr "绑定全部 IP 地址" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:145 msgid "Use Authentication" @@ -397,26 +396,49 @@ #. discovery authentication #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:119 -msgid "Select the type of authentication. Use <b>No Authentication</b> or one of <b>Incoming</b> and <b>Outgoing</b> (can be both together). Then insert <b>User</b> and <b>Password</b>." -msgstr "选择认证类型。可使用<b>无认证</b>，或<b>进站</b>和<b>出站</b>之一 (进出站可同时选)。然后插入<b>用户</b>和<b>密码</b>。" +msgid "" +"Select the type of authentication. Use <b>No Authentication</b> or one of <b>" +"Incoming</b> and <b>Outgoing</b> (can be both together). Then insert <b>User<" +"/b> and <b>Password</b>." +msgstr "" +"选择认证类型。可使用<b>无认证</b>，或<b>进站</b>和<b>出站</b>之一 (进出站可同时选)。然后插入<b>用户</b>和<b>密码</b>。" #. target client setup. #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:124 -msgid "<p>Use <b>Add</b> to give a client access for a LUN imported from target portal group. Specify which client is allowed to access it (client name is <i>InitiatorName</i> in '/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' on iscsi initiator). <b>Delete</b> will remove the client access to the LUN.</p>" -msgstr "<p>使用<b>添加</b>来给予一个客户端从目标门户组导入的逻辑单元编号的访问权限。请指定允许访问逻辑单元编号的客户端 (客户端名称为 iscsi 发起端上的 '/etc/iscsi/initatorname.iscsi' 中的<i>发起端名称</i>)。<b>删除</b>将移除该客户端对逻辑单元编号的访问权限。</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Add</b> to give a client access for a LUN imported from target " +"portal group. Specify which client is allowed to access it (client name is <i>" +"InitiatorName</i> in '/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' on iscsi initiator). <b>" +"Delete</b> will remove the client access to the LUN.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>使用<b>添加</b>来给予一个客户端从目标门户组导入的逻辑单元编号的访问权限。请指定允许访问逻辑单元编号的客户端 (客户端名称为 iscsi " +"发起端上的 '/etc/iscsi/initatorname.iscsi' 中的<i>发起端名称</i>)。<b>删除</b>" +"将移除该客户端对逻辑单元编号的访问权限。</p>" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:130 -msgid "<p>With <b>Edit LUN</b> one can modify the LUN mapping. Please note that LUN target number must be unique.<br>After pressing <b>Edit Auth</b>, select the type of authentication. Use <b>Incoming</b>, <b>Outgoing</b> or both together. Then insert <b>User</b> and <b>Password</b>. If <b>Use Authentication</b> is disabled in previous dialog, <b>Edit Auth</b> is disabled here.</p>" -msgstr "<p>使用<b>编辑逻辑单元编号</b>可修改逻辑单元编号映射。请注意逻辑单元编号目标数字必须唯一。<br>在按下<b>编辑认证</b>后，请选择认证类型。可使用<b>进站</b>、<b>出站</b>或两者。然后插入<b>用户</b>和<b>密码</b>。若在之前对话框禁用了<b>使用认证</b>，那这里的<b>编辑认证</b>也是禁用的。</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>With <b>Edit LUN</b> one can modify the LUN mapping. Please note that LUN " +"target number must be unique.<br>After pressing <b>Edit Auth</b>, select the " +"type of authentication. Use <b>Incoming</b>, <b>Outgoing</b> or both " +"together. Then insert <b>User</b> and <b>Password</b>. If <b>Use " +"Authentication</b> is disabled in previous dialog, <b>Edit Auth</b> is " +"disabled here.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>使用<b>编辑逻辑单元编号</b>可修改逻辑单元编号映射。请注意逻辑单元编号目标数字必须唯一。<br>在按下<b>编辑认证</b>" +"后，请选择认证类型。可使用<b>进站</b>、<b>出站</b>或两者。然后插入<b>用户</b>和<b>密码</b>。若在之前对话框禁用了<b>" +"使用认证</b>，那这里的<b>编辑认证</b>也是禁用的。</p>" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:136 -msgid "<p><b>Copy</b> offers the possibility to give an additional client access to the LUN.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Copy</b> offers the possibility to give an additional client access to " +"the LUN.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>复制</b>提供了给予另一个客户端逻辑单元编号访问权限的可能。</p>" #. target dialog #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:138 msgid "" -"List of offered targets and target portal groups. Create a new target by clicking <b>Add</b>.\n" +"List of offered targets and target portal groups. Create a new target by " +"clicking <b>Add</b>.\n" "To delete or modify an item, select it and press <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b>." msgstr "" "所提供的目标和目标门户组列表。点击<b>添加</b>可创建一个新目标。\n" @@ -431,9 +453,11 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:146 msgid "" -"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a <b>LUN</b>.\n" +"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a <b>" +"LUN</b>.\n" "You have to provide <b>path</b> to either block devices or file. \n" -"The <b>LUN name</b> is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the <b>LUN</b>. \n" +"The <b>LUN name</b> is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the <b>LUN</b>. " +"\n" "The name needs to be unique within the target portal group. If the user\n" "does not provide a name for LUN, it is generated automatically." msgstr "" @@ -446,7 +470,8 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:153 #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:172 msgid "" -"<p>Under <b>Ip Address</b> and <b>Port Number</b> you specify under which address\n" +"<p>Under <b>Ip Address</b> and <b>Port Number</b> you specify under which " +"address\n" "and port the service will be available. Default for port number is 3260.\n" "Only ip addresses assigned to one of the network cards are possible." msgstr "" @@ -459,9 +484,11 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:165 msgid "" -"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a lun.\n" +"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a " +"lun.\n" "You have to provide <b>path</b> to either block devices or file. \n" -"The <b>LUN name</b> is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the <b>LUN</b>. \n" +"The <b>LUN name</b> is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the <b>LUN</b>. " +"\n" "The name needs to be unique within the target portal group. If the user\n" "does not provide a name for LUN, it is generated automatically." msgstr "" @@ -472,13 +499,17 @@ "它将自动生成。" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:179 -msgid "It is possible to <b>add</b>, <b>edit</b> or <b>delete</b> all additional configuration options." +msgid "" +"It is possible to <b>add</b>, <b>edit</b> or <b>delete</b> all additional " +"configuration options." msgstr "可以<b>添加</b>、<b>编辑</b>或<b>删除</b>全部额外配置选项。" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:184 msgid "" -"Edit <b>LUN</b> number if needed, set <b>Type</b> (nullio is for testing purposes).\n" -"If Type=fileio set <b>Path</b> to disk device or file.<b>SCSI ID</b> and <b>Sectors</b> are optional." +"Edit <b>LUN</b> number if needed, set <b>Type</b> (nullio is for testing " +"purposes).\n" +"If Type=fileio set <b>Path</b> to disk device or file.<b>SCSI ID</b> and <b>" +"Sectors</b> are optional." msgstr "" "如有需要可编辑 <b>逻辑单元编号</b>，设置<b>类型</b> (nullio 用于测试目的)。\n" "若类型为 fileio，则请设置磁盘设备或文件的<b>路径</b>。<b>SCSI ID</b> 和<b>扇区</b>为可选项。" Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/isns.zh_CN.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/isns.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 09:48:57 UTC (rev 90542) +++ trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/isns.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 10:00:27 UTC (rev 90543) @@ -4,15 +4,15 @@ # Copyright (C) 2001 SuSE GmbH. # # Marguerite Su, 2012. -# 玛格丽特 · 苏 <i@marguerite.su>, 2013. +# 玛格丽特 · 苏 <i@marguerite.su>, 2013, 2014. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 16:20+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-02-03 16:26+0800\n" -"Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <i@marguerite.su>\n" -"Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <opensuse-zh@opensuse.org>\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 17:18+0800\n" +"Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <marguerite@opensuse.org>\n" +"Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_CN\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -171,25 +171,59 @@ "配置一个 iSNS 服务器。<br></p>\n" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:39 -msgid "<p>The list of all available iSCSI nodes registered with the iSNS service are displayed.</p> <p>Nodes are registered by iSCSI initiators and iSCSI targets.</p> <p> It is only possible to <b>delete</b> them. Deleting a node removes it from the iSNS database.</p>" -msgstr "<p>显示了全部与 iSNS 服务注册的可用 iSCSI 节点列表</p> <p>节点由 iSCSI 发起端和 iSCSI 目标端注册。</p> <p>只能<b>删除</b>它们。删除一个节点将从 iSNS 数据库移除它。</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The list of all available iSCSI nodes registered with the iSNS service are " +"displayed.</p> <p>Nodes are registered by iSCSI initiators and iSCSI " +"targets.</p> <p> It is only possible to <b>delete</b> them. Deleting a node " +"removes it from the iSNS database.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>显示了全部与 iSNS 服务注册的可用 iSCSI 节点列表</p> <p>节点由 iSCSI 发起端和 iSCSI 目标端注册。</p> <p>" +"只能<b>删除</b>它们。删除一个节点将从 iSNS 数据库移除它。</p>" #. discovery domains #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:43 -msgid "A list of all discovery domains is displayed. It is possible to <b>Create</b> a discovery domain or <b>Delete</b> one. <p>Deleting a domain removes the members from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node members.</p>" -msgstr "显示了全部发现域列表。可以<b>创建</b>或<b>删除</b>一个发现域。<p>删除一个发现域将从此域移除成员但不会删除 iSCSI 节点成员本身。</p>" +msgid "" +"A list of all discovery domains is displayed. It is possible to <b>Create</b> " +"a discovery domain or <b>Delete</b> one. <p>Deleting a domain removes the " +"members from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node members.</p>" +msgstr "" +"显示了全部发现域列表。可以<b>创建</b>或<b>删除</b>一个发现域。<p>删除一个发现域将从此域移除成员但不会删除 iSCSI 节点成员本身。<" +"/p>" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:46 -msgid "A list of all iSCSI nodes are displayed by discovery domain. Selecting another discovery domain refreshes the list with members from that discovery domain. It is possible to <b>Add</b> an iSCSI node to a discovery domain or <b>Delete</b> the node. <p>Deleting a node removes it from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node</p> <p>Creating an iSCSI node allows a not yet registered node to be added as a member of the discovery domain. When the initiator or target registers this node then it becomes part of this domain</p> <p>When an iSCSI initiator does a discovery request, the iSNS service returns all iSCSI node targets that are members of the same Discovery Domains.</p> " -msgstr "发现域显示了全部 iSCSI 节点列表。选择另一个发现域将刷新那个发现域的成员列表。可以<b>添加</b>一个 iSCSI 节点到一个发现域，或从一个发现域<b>删除</b>一个 iSCSI 节点</p> <p>创建一个 iSCSI 节点允许添加一个尚未注册的节点为发现域的成员。当发起端或目标端注册了此节点时，此节点就变成了此域的一部分</p> <p>当一个 iSCSI 发起端做出域发现请求时，iSNS 服务将返回属于同一发现域的全部 iSCSI 节点目标。</p>" +msgid "" +"A list of all iSCSI nodes are displayed by discovery domain. Selecting " +"another discovery domain refreshes the list with members from that discovery " +"domain. It is possible to <b>Add</b> an iSCSI node to a discovery domain or " +"<b>Delete</b> the node. <p>Deleting a node removes it from the domain but " +"does not delete the iSCSI node</p> <p>Creating an iSCSI node allows a not yet " +"registered node to be added as a member of the discovery domain. When the " +"initiator or target registers this node then it becomes part of this domain<" +"/p> <p>When an iSCSI initiator does a discovery request, the iSNS service " +"returns all iSCSI node targets that are members of the same Discovery " +"Domains.</p> " +msgstr "" +"发现域显示了全部 iSCSI 节点列表。选择另一个发现域将刷新那个发现域的成员列表。可以<b>添加</b>一个 iSCSI " +"节点到一个发现域，或从一个发现域<b>删除</b>一个 iSCSI 节点</p> <p>创建一个 iSCSI " +"节点允许添加一个尚未注册的节点为发现域的成员。当发起端或目标端注册了此节点时，此节点就变成了此域的一部分</p> <p>当一个 iSCSI " +"发起端做出域发现请求时，iSNS 服务将返回属于同一发现域的全部 iSCSI 节点目标。</p>" #. dds table dialog #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:50 -msgid "At the top a list of all Discovery Domain Sets are displayed. Discovery Domains belong to Discovery Domain Sets. <p>A Discovery Domain must be a member of a Discovery Domain Set in order to be active. </p><p>In an iSNS database, a Discovery Domain Set contains Discovery Domains and Discovery Domains contain iSCSI Node members.</p>" -msgstr "在列表上部显示了全部发现域集。发现域属于发现域集。<p>一个发现域必须是一个发现域集的成员才能处于活动状态。</p><p>在一个 iSNS 数据库中，发现域集包含发现域，发现域包含 iSCSI 节点成员。</p>" +msgid "" +"At the top a list of all Discovery Domain Sets are displayed. Discovery " +"Domains belong to Discovery Domain Sets. <p>A Discovery Domain must be a " +"member of a Discovery Domain Set in order to be active. </p><p>In an iSNS " +"database, a Discovery Domain Set contains Discovery Domains and Discovery " +"Domains contain iSCSI Node members.</p>" +msgstr "" +"在列表上部显示了全部发现域集。发现域属于发现域集。<p>一个发现域必须是一个发现域集的成员才能处于活动状态。</p><p>在一个 iSNS " +"数据库中，发现域集包含发现域，发现域包含 iSCSI 节点成员。</p>" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:53 -msgid "<p>The discovery domain set members list is refreshed whenever a different discovery domain set is selected.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The discovery domain set members list is refreshed whenever a different " +"discovery domain set is selected.</p>" msgstr "<p>当选择了不同的发现域集时，将刷新发现域集成员列表。</p>" #. **************** global funcions and variables ***** @@ -232,10 +266,9 @@ #. boolean display = true; #. Report::DisplayErrors(display,10); #: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:351 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Unable to connect to iSNS server. Check iSNS server address." msgid "Unable to connect to iSNS server. Check if iSNS server is running." -msgstr "无法连接到 iSNS 服务器。请检查 iSNS 服务器地址。" +msgstr "无法连接到 iSNS 服务器。请检查 iSNS 服务器是否运行。" #. Initialization dialog caption #: src/include/isns/wizards.rb:70 @@ -249,7 +282,8 @@ #. test if required package ("open-isns") is installed #: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:149 -msgid "<p>To configure the isns service, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>To configure the isns service, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" msgstr "<p>必须安装 <b>%1</b> 软件包才能配置 iSNS 服务。</p>" #: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:152 Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/mail.zh_CN.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/mail.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 09:48:57 UTC (rev 90542) +++ trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/mail.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 10:00:27 UTC (rev 90543) @@ -10,9 +10,9 @@ "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 16:21+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-04-16 15:18+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 17:33+0800\n" "Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <marguerite@opensuse.org>\n" -"Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <opensuse-zh@opensuse.org>\n" +"Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_CN\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -106,7 +106,8 @@ #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:79 msgid "" "<p>If choosing <b>No Connection</b>, the mail server will be started.\n" -"However, only local mail transport is possible. The MTA listens to the localhost.</p>\n" +"However, only local mail transport is possible. The MTA listens to the " +"localhost.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>如果选择<b>无连接</b>，邮件服务器会启动，\n" "但仅支持本地邮件传输。邮件传输代理在本机上监听。</p>\n" @@ -138,7 +139,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>The outgoing mail server is generally intended for dial-up connections.\n" -"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as <b>smtp.provider.com</b>.</p>\n" +"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as <b>" +"smtp.provider.com</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<p>外发邮件服务器一般可使用拨号连接。\n" @@ -148,7 +150,8 @@ #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:109 msgid "" "\n" -"<p>In the <b>User Name</b> field, enter the user name assigned by from your provider.</p>\n" +"<p>In the <b>User Name</b> field, enter the user name assigned by from your " +"provider.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<p>在<b>用户名</b>字段中，输入提供商指派的用户名。</p>\n" @@ -192,7 +195,8 @@ "\n" "<p>This table redirects mail delivered locally.\n" "Redirect it to another local user (useful for system accounts,\n" -"especially for <b>root</b>), to a remote address, or to a list of addresses.</p>\n" +"especially for <b>root</b>), to a remote address, or to a list of addresses.<" +"/p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<p>此表重定向本地投递的邮件。\n" @@ -353,16 +357,14 @@ msgstr "启动 &fetchmail" #: src/include/mail/ui.rb:523 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "[manually set]" msgid "manual" -msgstr "[手工设置]" +msgstr "手动" #: src/include/mail/ui.rb:523 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "FTP daemon" msgid "daemon" -msgstr "FTP 守护程序" +msgstr "守护进程" #. frame label: mail downloading (fetchmail) #: src/include/mail/ui.rb:529 @@ -739,7 +741,8 @@ "\n" "<p>Enabling DKIM for outgoing emails requires additional actions. A SSL key\n" "will be generated for the 'mydomain' value defined in Postfix. A new service\n" -"'submission' will be configured in Postfix. After this is set up you can send\n" +"'submission' will be configured in Postfix. After this is set up you can " +"send\n" "email with this service 'submission' from 'mynetworks' with enabled SASL\n" "authentication. Only the emails sent by this new service will be signed with\n" "the domain key.</p>\n" @@ -757,17 +760,21 @@ "Service. The public key will be saved as a DNS TXT record\n" "in <b>/var/db/dkim/[mydomain].public.txt</b> and needs to be deployed to an\n" "according Domain Name Service. If there is a name service\n" -"running on this server, which is the authoritative server for that domain, the\n" +"running on this server, which is the authoritative server for that domain, " +"the\n" "public key will be added as a TXT record to that domain zone\n" "automatically.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"<p>域密钥的公共密钥需要由域名服务提供。公共密钥必须以 DNS TXT 记录格式存储在 <b>/var/db/dkim/[我的域名].public.txt</b>\n" -"并且需要部署到相应域名服务。如果此服务器上运行了名称服务器，该名称服务器又是那个域的验证服务器，那么公共密钥可以自动添加为那个域区域的 TXT 记录。</p>\n" +"<p>域密钥的公共密钥需要由域名服务提供。公共密钥必须以 DNS TXT 记录格式存储在 <b>" +"/var/db/dkim/[我的域名].public.txt</b>\n" +"并且需要部署到相应域名服务。如果此服务器上运行了名称服务器，该名称服务器又是那个域的验证服务器，那么公共密钥可以自动添加为那个域区域的 TXT 记录。<" +"/p>\n" #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:215 -msgid "If you enable DKIM support, the virus scanning (AMaViS) will be enabled too." +msgid "" +"If you enable DKIM support, the virus scanning (AMaViS) will be enabled too." msgstr "如果您想要启用 DKIM 支持，同时也会启用病毒扫描 (AMaViS)。" #. Translators: text entry label @@ -812,7 +819,9 @@ #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:306 -msgid "<p>The <b>delivery mode</b> is usually <b>Directly</b>, unless you do not forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>delivery mode</b> is usually <b>Directly</b>, unless you do not " +"forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>投递方式</b>通常是 <b>直接</b>，除非不转发 root 用户的邮件或要通过 IMAP 来访问邮件。</p>" #. LogView label. take a string from users? Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/registration.zh_CN.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/registration.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 09:48:57 UTC (rev 90542) +++ trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/registration.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 10:00:27 UTC (rev 90543) @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 16:21+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-08-23 02:15+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 17:15+0800\n" "Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <marguerite@opensuse.org>\n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_TW\n" @@ -133,7 +133,9 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:301 -msgid "Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get updates and extensions." +msgid "" +"Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get " +"updates and extensions." msgstr "在此输入 SUSE 客服中心账户信息来注册系统以获得更新和扩展。" #. not set yet? @@ -199,11 +201,15 @@ msgstr "<p>系统已注册。</p>" #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:471 -msgid "<p>You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or modules to enhance the functionality of the system.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or " +"modules to enhance the functionality of the system.</p>" msgstr "<p>您可以再次注册或注册额外扩展或模块以增强系统功能。</p>" #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:473 -msgid "<p>If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE Customer Center and remove the system manually there.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE " +"Customer Center and remove the system manually there.</p>" msgstr "<p>若您想要反注册您的系统，您需要登入 SUSE 客服中心并在那里手动移除该系统。</p>" #. error message @@ -487,6 +493,9 @@ "Make sure the latest product supporting the new registration\n" "protocol is installed at the server." msgstr "" +"检测到了一个旧的注册服务器，位于\n" +"%s。\n" +"请确保服务器上安装了最新的支持新注册协议的产品。" #. progress step title #: src/lib/registration/finish_dialog.rb:35 @@ -600,7 +609,9 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:41 msgid "" "<p>Enter registration codes for the requested extensions or modules.</p>\n" -"<p>Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you cannot provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective extension or module.</p>" +"<p>Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you cannot " +"provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective " +"extension or module.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>请输入所请求扩展或模块的注册码。</p>\n" "<p>注册码为成功注册所必需。若您无法提供注册码则请返回并反选相应扩展或模块。</p>" @@ -623,17 +634,22 @@ #. help text (1/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:47 -msgid "<p>Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem.</p>" msgstr "<p>在此您可为您的系统选择可用扩展和模块。</p>" #. help text (2/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:50 -msgid "<p>Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific registration code.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific " +"registration code.</p>" msgstr "<p>请注意，某些扩展或模块可能需要指定的注册码。</p>" #. help text (3/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:53 -msgid "<p>If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the SUSE Customer Center and remove them manually there.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the SUSE " +"Customer Center and remove them manually there.</p>" msgstr "<p>若您想要移除扩展或模块，您需要登入 SUSE 客服中心并在那里手动移除它们。</p>" #. always enable Back/Next, the dialog cannot be the first in workflow @@ -662,7 +678,9 @@ #. help text #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:33 -msgid "<p>Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered together with the base product.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered together " +"with the base product.</p>" msgstr "<p>在此您可选择与基础产品一起注册的扩展和模块。</p>" #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:36 @@ -718,9 +736,11 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:51 msgid "" -"<p>Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center database,\n" +"<p>Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center " +"database,\n" "enabling you to get online updates and technical support.\n" -"To register while installing automatically, select <b>Run Product Registration</b>.</p>" +"To register while installing automatically, select <b>Run Product " +"Registration</b>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>产品注册会将您的产品收纳在 SUSE 客服中心数据库中，\n" "使您能够获得在线更新和技术支持。\n" @@ -728,7 +748,8 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:56 msgid "" -"<p>If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL of the server\n" +"<p>If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL " +"of the server\n" "and the location of the SMT certificate in <b>SMT Server Settings</b>. Refer\n" "to your SMT manual for further assistance.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -803,27 +824,38 @@ #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (1/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:119 -msgid "<p>Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the " +"authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data.</p>" msgstr "<p>安全连接 (HTTPS) 使用 SSL 证书来校验服务器的权威性和加密所传输的数据。</p>" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (2/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:123 -msgid "<p>You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the issuer of the unknown certificate.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known " +"certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the " +"issuer of the unknown certificate.</p>" msgstr "<p>您可以选择导入该证书到已知证书签发机构 (CA) 列表中，这意味着您信任该未知证书的主体和签发人。</p>" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (3/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:128 -msgid "<p>Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed certificate.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed " +"certificate.</p>" msgstr "<p>导入证书将允许使用例如自签名的证书。</p>" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (4/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:132 -msgid "<p><b>Important:</b> You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Important:</b> You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to " +"be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>重要：</b>您应该校验该证书的指纹来确保您从所请求的服务器导入了真正的证书。</p>" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (5/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:137 -msgid "<p><b>Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big security risk.</b></p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big security " +"risk.</b></p>" msgstr "<p><b>未校验即导入一个未知证书是一个巨大的安全风险。</b></p>" #. error message, the entered URL is not valid Modified: trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/storage.zh_CN.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/storage.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 09:48:57 UTC (rev 90542) +++ trunk/yast/zh_CN/po/storage.zh_CN.po 2014-10-30 10:00:27 UTC (rev 90543) @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ "Project-Id-Version: storage\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 16:21+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-08-01 02:14+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 17:20+0800\n" "Last-Translator: 玛格丽特 · 苏 <marguerite@opensuse.org>\n" "Language-Team: Chinese Simplified <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_CN\n" @@ -640,7 +640,8 @@ #. normally the target is located on hard disks. Here no hard disks #. can be found. YaST2 cannot install. Update CD might have newer drivers. #: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:172 -msgid "No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." +msgid "" +"No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." msgstr "未找到磁盘。如果有的话，请尝试使用更新 CD 来安装，它或许有新一些磁盘驱动。" #. There are several hard disks found. Linux is completely installed on @@ -1181,7 +1182,8 @@ "You have not assigned a swap partition. In most cases, we highly recommend \n" "to create and assign a swap partition.\n" "Swap partitions on your system are listed in the main window with the\n" -"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point \"swap\".\n" +"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point " +"\"swap\".\n" "You can assign more than one swap partition, if desired.\n" "\n" "Really use the setup without swap partition?\n" @@ -1299,9 +1301,11 @@ #. popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:766 msgid "" -"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently mounted:\n" +"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently " +"mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the extended partition.\n" +"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the " +"extended partition.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" "所选扩展分区包含了当前已挂载的分区：\n" @@ -1477,7 +1481,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:480 msgid "" "<p><b>Volume Label:</b>\n" -"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" +"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " +"makes sense only \n" "when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1505,10 +1510,9 @@ #. label text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:516 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "UUID" msgid "&UUID" -msgstr "UUID" +msgstr "&UUID" #. label text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:526 @@ -1705,7 +1709,8 @@ msgid "" "The selected device contains partitions that are currently mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the partition table.\n" +"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the " +"partition table.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" "所选设备包含了当前已挂载的分区：\n" @@ -1857,7 +1862,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:708 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/tmp.\n" +"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or " +"/var/tmp.\n" "If you leave the encryption password empty, the system will create\n" "a random password at system startup for you. This means, you will lose all\n" "data on these filesystems at system shutdown.\n" @@ -1875,7 +1881,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:723 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file system.\n" +"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file " +"system.\n" "Choose your password carefully. A combination of letters and numbers\n" "is recommended. To ensure the password was entered correctly,\n" "enter it twice.\n" @@ -1894,7 +1901,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:737 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have at\n" +"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have " +"at\n" "least %1 characters and, as a rule, not contain any special characters\n" "(e.g., letters with accents or umlauts).\n" "</p>\n" @@ -1948,7 +1956,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:159 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore is\n" +"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore " +"is\n" "not needed for the update, you may select <b>Skip</b>. In this case, the\n" "file system is not accessed during update.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -2080,7 +2089,8 @@ #. error popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:259 -msgid "Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." +msgid "" +"Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." msgstr "挂载点中的字符无效。不要在挂载点中使用 \"`'!\"%#\"。" #. error popup text @@ -3612,7 +3622,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:36 msgid "" "\n" -"<p><b>Path Name of Loop File:</b><br>This must be an absolute path to the file\n" +"<p><b>Path Name of Loop File:</b><br>This must be an absolute path to the " +"file\n" "containing the data for the encrypted loop device to set up.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" @@ -3903,7 +3914,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:491 msgid "" "<p>Enter the size as well as the number and size\n" -"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be higher\n" +"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be " +"higher\n" "than the number of physical volumes of the volume group.</p>" msgstr "<p>为新逻辑卷输入尺寸、分带数和分带尺寸。分带数不能大于卷组的物理卷数。</p>" @@ -3952,7 +3964,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:778 msgid "" "<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Normal Volume</b>.\n" -"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before the feature of <b>Thin Provisioning</b> existed.\n" +"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before " +"the feature of <b>Thin Provisioning</b> existed.\n" "If in doubt this is most probably the right choice</p>" msgstr "" "你可以将逻辑卷声明为 <b>正常卷</b>。\n" @@ -3962,7 +3975,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:787 msgid "" "<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Thin Pool</b>.\n" -"This means <b>Thin Volumes</b> allocate their needed space on demand from such a pool.</p>" +"This means <b>Thin Volumes</b> allocate their needed space on demand from " +"such a pool.</p>" msgstr "" "您可以将逻辑卷声明为 <b>瘦池</b>。\n" "这意味着<b>瘦卷</b>将能按需从此池中分配它们所需的空间。</p>" @@ -3971,7 +3985,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:794 msgid "" "<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Thin Volume</b>.\n" -"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a <b>Thin Pool</b>.</p>" +"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a <b>Thin Pool</b>" +".</p>" msgstr "" "<p>您可以将逻辑卷声明为 <b>瘦卷</b>。\n" "这意味着该卷将按需从<b>瘦池</b>中分配所需空间。</p>" @@ -4028,7 +4043,8 @@ msgid "" "There are not enough suitable unused devices to create a volume group.\n" "\n" -"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one unused\n" +"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one " +"unused\n" "RAID device is required. Change your partition table accordingly." msgstr "" "没有足够的合适的未使用设备来创建卷组。\n" @@ -4253,7 +4269,9 @@ #. fallback dialog content #: src/include/partitioning/ep-nfs.rb:55 -msgid "NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package installation." +msgid "" +"NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package " +"installation." msgstr "网络文件系统配置不可用。请检查是否安装了 yast2-nfs-client 软件包。" #. heading @@ -4285,7 +4303,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:87 msgid "" "<p><b>RAID 0:</b> This level increases your disk performance.\n" -"There is <b>NO</b> redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, data recovery will not be possible.</p>\n" +"There is <b>NO</b> redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, " +"data recovery will not be possible.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>RAID 0</b>：此级别可提高磁盘性能。\n" "在此方式中<b>没有</b>冗余。如果其中一个驱动器崩溃，将无法恢复数据。</p>\n" @@ -4294,8 +4313,10 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:95 msgid "" "<p><b>RAID 1:</b> <br>This mode has the best redundancy. It can be\n" -"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data on all\n" -"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The partitions\n" +"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data on " +"all\n" +"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The " +"partitions\n" "used for this type of RAID should have approximately the same size.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>RAID 1：</b> <br>这种方式具有最佳冗余性能。用在\n" @@ -4307,8 +4328,10 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:106 msgid "" "<p><b>RAID 5:</b> <br>This mode combines management of a larger number\n" -"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three disks or more.\n" -"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail simultaneously, all data is lost</p>\n" +"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three " +"disks or more.\n" +"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail " +"simultaneously, all data is lost</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>RAID 5：</b> <br>这种方式既能管理数量更多的磁盘，\n" "还能保持一定的冗余程度。这种方式适用于三个或更多磁盘的情况。\n" @@ -4328,8 +4351,10 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:126 msgid "" "<p>Add partitions to your RAID. According to\n" -"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), the size\n" -"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).</p>\n" +"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), " +"the size\n" +"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).</p>" +"\n" msgstr "" "<p>向 RAID 添加分区。根据\n" "RAID 的类型，可用磁盘尺寸是这些分区尺寸之和 (RAID0)、最小分区的\n" @@ -4396,8 +4421,10 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:338 msgid "" "<p><b>Chunk Size:</b><br>It is the smallest \"atomic\" mass\n" -"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID 5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" -"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect the array very much.</p>\n" +"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID " +"5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" +"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect " +"the array very much.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>区块尺寸：</b><br>这是可以写入设备的\n" "最小\"单位\"数据块。RAID 5 的合理区块尺寸为 128KB。对于 RAID 0，\n" @@ -4411,7 +4438,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:353 msgid "" "The parity algorithm to use with RAID5/6.\n" -"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks with rotating platters.\n" +"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks " +"with rotating platters.\n" msgstr "" "RAID5/6 所用的奇偶校验算法。\n" "对于典型的旋转盘片磁盘来说，左对称能够提供最佳性能。\n" @@ -4679,9 +4707,11 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Default Mount by</b> gives the mount by\n" "method for newly created file systems. <i>Device Name</i> uses the kernel\n" -"device name, which is not persistent. <i>Device ID</i> and <i>Device Path</i>\n" +"device name, which is not persistent. <i>Device ID</i> and <i>Device Path</i>" +"\n" "use names generated by udev from hardware information. These should be\n" -"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally <i>UUID</i> and\n" +"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally <i>UUID</i> " +"and\n" "<i>Volume Label</i> use the file systems UUID and label.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>默认挂载方式</b> 给出新创建文件系统的挂载方式。<i>设备名称</i>\n" @@ -4700,7 +4730,9 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:217 msgid "" "<p><b>Alignment of Newly Created Partitions</b>\n" -"determines how created partitions are aligned. <b>cylinder</b> is the traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. <b>optimal</b> aligns the \n" +"determines how created partitions are aligned. <b>cylinder</b> is the " +"traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. <b>optimal</b> " +"aligns the \n" "partitions for best performance according to hints provided by the Linux \n" "kernel or tries to be compatible with Windows Vista and Win 7.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -4966,7 +4998,8 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:316 msgid "" "<p>This dialog is for defining classes for the raid devices\n" -"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many cases\n" +"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many " +"cases\n" "fewer classes are needed (e.g. only A and B). </p>" msgstr "" "<p>该对话框用来为 RAID 中的 RAID 设备定义分类。可用的分类为 A、B、C、B 和 E，\n" @@ -4976,9 +5009,12 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:325 msgid "" "<p>You can put a device into a class by right-clicking on the\n" -"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing the \n" -"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class in\n" -"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put currently \n" +"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing the " +"\n" +"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class " +"in\n" +"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put " +"currently \n" "selected devices into this class.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>您可以通过右键点击该设备并从交互菜单中选择合适的分类来给设备归类。\n" @@ -5023,17 +5059,22 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:379 msgid "" "By pressing button \"<b>%1</b>\" you can select a file that contains\n" -"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All devices that match \n" -"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular expression is \n" +"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All " +"devices that match \n" +"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular " +"expression is \n" "matched against the kernel name (e.g. /dev/sda1), \n" -"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1) and the\n" +"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1" +") and the\n" "the udev id (e.g. /dev/disk/by-id/ata-ST3500418AS_9VMN8X8L-part1). \n" -"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more then one\n" +"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more " +"then one\n" "regular expression.</p>" msgstr "" "通过按键 \"<b>%1</b>\" 您可以选择一个带有正则表达式和类名 (例如 \"sda* A\") 的文件。\n" "所有匹配此正则表达式的设备都将被归类为此行中指定的分类名。正则表达式可以匹配内核名(例如 /dev/sda1)，\n" -"udev 路径名 (例如 /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f:2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1) 和 udev id (例如\n" +"udev 路径名 (例如 /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f:2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1) 和 udev id " +"(例如\n" "/dev/disk/by-id/ata-ST3500418AS_9VMN8X8L-part1)。\n" "如果设备名匹配了多个正则表达式，第一个匹配将最终决定分类名。。</p>" @@ -5070,7 +5111,8 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:297 msgid "" "<p><b>Tmpfs Size:</b>\n" -"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or Gigabyte or\n" +"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or " +"Gigabyte or\n" "as a number followed by a percent sign meaning percentage of memory.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>缓存文件系统尺寸：</b>\n" @@ -5105,7 +5147,8 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:485 msgid "" "<p><b>Mount Read-Only:</b>\n" -"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During installation\n" +"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During " +"installation\n" "the file system is always mounted read-write.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>只读挂载：</b>\n" @@ -5128,10 +5171,9 @@ #. button text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:511 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Mountable by &User" msgid "Mountable by User" -msgstr "可由用户挂载(&U)" +msgstr "可由用户挂载" #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:515 @@ -5153,8 +5195,10 @@ "<p><b>Do Not Mount at System Start-up:</b>\n" "The file system is not automatically mounted when the system starts.\n" "An entry in /etc/fstab is created and the file system is mounted\n" -"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point></tt>\n" -"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is mounted). Default is false.</p>\n" +"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point><" +"/tt>\n" +"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is " +"mounted). Default is false.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>不在系统启动时挂载：</b>\n" "系统启动时文件系统不会自动挂载。\n" @@ -5192,8 +5236,10 @@ "<tt>journal</tt> -- All data is committed to the journal prior to being\n" "written into the main file system. Highest performance impact.<br>\n" "<tt>ordered</tt> -- All data is forced directly out to the main file system\n" -"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance impact.<br>\n" -"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact.</p>\n" +"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance " +"impact.<br>\n" +"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact.<" +"/p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>数据日志模式：</b>\n" "指定文件数据的日志模式。\n" @@ -5237,14 +5283,17 @@ msgstr "任意选项值(&V)" #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:647 -msgid "Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try again." +msgid "" +"Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try " +"again." msgstr "自由选项值中有无效字符。不要使用空格或 Tab。请重试。" #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:651 msgid "" "<p><b>Arbitrary Option Value:</b>\n" -"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of /etc/fstab.\n" +"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of " +"/etc/fstab.\n" "Multiple options are separated by commas.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>任意选项值</b>：\n" @@ -5274,7 +5323,8 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:706 msgid "" "<p><b>Codepage for Short FAT Names:</b>\n" -"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file systems.</p>\n" +"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file " +"systems.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>文件配置表短名称的代码页：</b>\n" "此代码页用于 FAT 文件系统上的短名称字符转换。</p>\n" @@ -5288,7 +5338,8 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:726 msgid "" "<p><b>Number of FATs:</b>\n" -"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default is 2.</p>" +"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default " +"is 2.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>文件配置表数量：</b>\n" "指定文件系统中的文件配置表的数量。默认值是 2。</p>" @@ -5302,7 +5353,9 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:746 msgid "" "<p><b>FAT Size:</b>\n" -"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable for the file system size.</p>\n" +"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If " +"auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable for " +"the file system size.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>文件配置表尺寸：</b>\n" "指定所用文件配置表的类型(12 位、16 位或 32 位)。如果指定自动选项，YaST2 将为文件系统尺寸自动选择最适合的值。</p>\n" @@ -5335,7 +5388,8 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:787 msgid "" "<p><b>Hash Function:</b>\n" -"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names in directories.</p>\n" +"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names in " +"directories.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>哈希函数：</b>\n" "此选项指定对文件夹中的文件名进行排序所用的哈希函数的名称。</p>\n" @@ -5349,10 +5403,14 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:803 msgid "" "<p><b>FS Revision:</b>\n" -"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to 2.4.</p>\n" +"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for " +"backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more " +"recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to " +"2.4.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>文件系统修订版本：</b>\n" -"此选项定义要使用的 reiserfs 修订版本。\"3.5\"用于向后兼容 2.2.x 系列的内核。\"3.6\"是最新的，但只能用于 2.4 或更高版本的内核。</p>\n" +"此选项定义要使用的 reiserfs 修订版本。\"3.5\"用于向后兼容 2.2.x 系列的内核。\"3.6\"是最新的，但只能用于 2.4 " +"或更高版本的内核。</p>\n" #. label text #. label text @@ -5364,10 +5422,13 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:823 msgid "" "<p><b>Block Size:</b>\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size of 4096 is used.</p>\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, " +"2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size " +"of 4096 is used.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>块尺寸：</b>\n" -"指定以字节计的块尺寸。有效的块尺寸值为每个块 512、1024、2048 和 4096 字节。如果选中自动选项，将使用 4096 这个标准块尺寸。</p>\n" +"指定以字节计的块尺寸。有效的块尺寸值为每个块 512、1024、2048 和 4096 字节。如果选中自动选项，将使用 4096 这个标准块尺寸。</p>" +"\n" #. label text #. label text @@ -5394,7 +5455,8 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:875 msgid "" "<p><b>Percentage of Inode Space:</b>\n" -"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.</p>\n" +"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of " +"space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>索引节点空间百分比：</b>\n" "\"索引节点空间百分比\"选项指定文件系统中可分配给索引节点的最大空间百分比。</p>\n" @@ -5408,7 +5470,8 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:890 msgid "" "<p><b>Inode Aligned:</b>\n" -"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is or\n" +"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is " +"or\n" "is not aligned. By default inodes are aligned, which\n" "is usually more efficient than unaligned access.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -5436,7 +5499,8 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:934 msgid "" "<p><b>Log Size</b>\n" -"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the aggregate size.</p>\n" +"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the aggregate " +"size.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>日志尺寸</b>\n" "设置日志尺寸(以 MB 计)。如果选择自动选项，默认值为总尺寸的 40%。</p>\n" @@ -5477,10 +5541,13 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:987 msgid "" "<p><b>Block Size:</b>\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.</p>\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, " +"and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined " +"by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>块尺寸：</b>\n" -"指定以字节计的块尺寸。有效的块尺寸值为每个块 1024、2048 和 4096 字节。如果选中自动选项，块尺寸将由文件系统的尺寸和预期使用量来决定。</p>\n" +"指定以字节计的块尺寸。有效的块尺寸值为每个块 1024、2048 和 4096 字节。如果选中自动选项，块尺寸将由文件系统的尺寸和预期使用量来决定。</p>" +"\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:996 @@ -5500,7 +5567,8 @@ "value for this parameter.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>每索引节点的字节数：</b>\n" -"指定字节与索引节点的比率。YaST2 为磁盘上每 <bytes-per-inode> 个字节的空间创建一个索引节点。字节/索引节点 之比越大，创建的索引节点越少。\n" +"指定字节与索引节点的比率。YaST2 为磁盘上每 <bytes-per-inode> 个字节的空间创建一个索引节点。字节/索引节点 " +"之比越大，创建的索引节点越少。\n" "通常这个值不应小于文件系统中的块尺寸，因为若比块小的话就会创建太多的索引节点。 创建文件系统后，将无法扩展其中的索引节点的个数，\n" "因此务必为此参数输入一个合理值。</p>\n" @@ -5521,8 +5589,14 @@ #. xgettext: no-c-format #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1033 -msgid "<p><b>Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root:</b> Specify the percentage of blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally 1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved default is 0.1.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>为 root 保留的块的百分比：</b>指定为超级用户保留的块的百分比。该值默认会自动计算，通常保留 1G。默认保留的上限是 5.0, 下限是 0.1。</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root:</b> Specify the percentage of " +"blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally " +"1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved " +"default is 0.1.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>为 root 保留的块的百分比：</b>指定为超级用户保留的块的百分比。该值默认会自动计算，通常保留 1G。默认保留的上限是 5.0, 下限是 " +"0.1。</p>" #. checkbox text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1042 @@ -5561,7 +5635,8 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1103 msgid "" "<p><b>No Journal:</b>\n" -"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you really\n" +"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you " +"really\n" "know what you are doing.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>禁用日志：</b>\n" @@ -5787,7 +5862,8 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: error popup #: src/modules/Storage.rb:5177 -msgid "Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." +msgid "" +"Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." msgstr "无法创建分区因为磁盘上的其它分区正在使用中。" #: src/modules/Storage.rb:5203 @@ -6128,7 +6204,8 @@ #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:374 msgid "" "An asterisk (*) after the mount point\n" -"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because it\n" +"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because " +"it\n" "has the <tt>noauto</tt> option set in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>)." msgstr "" "挂载点后面的星号 (*) 表示此文件系统目前未挂载\n" @@ -6474,7 +6551,9 @@ #. enable snapshots for root volume if desired #. penalty for not having separate /home #: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:4552 src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:5675 -msgid "Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system under Windows." +msgid "" +"Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system " +"under Windows." msgstr "由于文件系统不一致，无法调整尺寸。请试试在 Windows 下检查文件系统。" #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text -- To unsubscribe, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+unsubscribe@opensuse.org To contact the owner, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+owner@opensuse.org